Table of Contents
- Contents
- Safety information
- Overview
- Selecting a location for the printer
- Additional printer setup
- Installing internal options
- Installing hardware options
- Attaching cables
- Setting up the printer software
- Networking
- Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
- Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
- Connecting the printer to a network using the Wireless Setup Wizard
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Wi-Fi Protected Setup
- Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
- Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
- Verifying printer setup
- Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn
- Learning about the printer
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Printing
- Managing your printer
- Finding advanced networking and administrator information
- Accessing the remote control panel
- Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
- Modifying confidential print settings
- Copying printer settings to other printers
- Printing a menu settings page
- Printing a network setup page
- Checking the status of parts and supplies
- Saving energy
- Restoring factory default settings
- Securing the printer
- Using MS810de
- Learning about the printer
- Setting up and using the home screen applications
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Printing
- Managing your printer
- Finding advanced networking and administrator information
- Checking the virtual display
- Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
- Modifying confidential print settings
- Copying printer settings to other printers
- Printing a menu settings page
- Printing a network setup page
- Checking the status of parts and supplies
- Saving energy
- Restoring factory default settings
- Securing the printer
- Using MS812de
- Learning about the printer
- Setting up and using the home screen applications
- Loading paper and specialty media
- Printing
- Managing your printer
- Finding advanced networking and administrator information
- Checking the virtual display
- Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
- Modifying confidential print settings
- Copying printer settings to other printers
- Printing a menu settings page
- Printing a network setup page
- Checking the status of parts and supplies
- Saving energy
- Restoring factory default settings
- Securing the printer
- Paper and specialty media guide
- Understanding the printer menus
- Saving money and the environment
- Maintaining the printer
- Clearing jams
- Avoiding jams
- Identifying jam locations
- Paper jam in the front door
- Paper jam in the rear door
- Paper jam in the standard bin
- Paper jam in the duplex unit
- Paper jam in trays
- Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
- Paper jam in the staple finisher
- Staple jam in the finisher
- Paper jam in the output expander
- Paper jam in the mailbox
- Troubleshooting
- Understanding the printer messages
- Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
- Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
- Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
- Check tray [x] connection
- Close door or insert cartridge
- Close finisher rear door
- Close rear door
- Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
- Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
- Defective flash detected [51]
- Disk full [62]
- Disk must be formatted for use in this device
- Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
- Empty the hole punch box
- Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
- Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
- Imaging unit low [84.xy]
- Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
- Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
- Incompatible output bin [x] [59]
- Incompatible tray [x] [59]
- Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
- Insert hole punch box
- Insert staple cartridge
- Insert Tray [x]
- Install bin [x]
- Install Tray [x]
- Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
- Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
- Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
- Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
- Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
- Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
- Load multipurpose feeder with [custom string] [orientation]
- Load multipurpose feeder with [custom type name] [orientation]
- Load multipurpose feeder with [paper size] [orientation]
- Load multipurpose feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [orientation]
- Load staples
- Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
- Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
- Maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
- Memory full [38]
- Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in output bin [24y.xx]
- Network [x] software error [54]
- Non-Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
- Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
- Paper changes needed
- Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
- Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
- Reattach bin [x]
- Reattach bins [x] – [y]
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
- Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
- Remove defective disk [61]
- Remove packaging material, [area name]
- Remove paper from all bins
- Remove paper from bin [x]
- Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
- Remove paper from standard output bin
- Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
- Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
- Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
- Replace maintenance kit, recommended life exceeded [80.xyz]
- Replace maintenance kit to resume printing [80.xy]
- Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]
- Replace missing fuser [31.xyz]
- Replace missing imaging unit [31.xy]
- Replace roller kit [81.xx]
- Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
- Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
- Replace wiper
- Restore held jobs?
- Serial port [x] disabled [56]
- Some held jobs were not restored
- Standard network software error [54]
- Standard USB port disabled [56]
- Supply needed to complete job
- The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled or provide unexpected results.
- Too many bins attached [58]
- Too many disks installed [58]
- Too many flash options installed [58]
- Too many trays attached [58]
- Tray [x] paper size unsupported
- Unformatted flash detected [53]
- Unsupported disk
- Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
- USB port [x] disabled [56]
- Solving printer problems
- Printer does not respond
- Printing problems
- Confidential and other held documents do not print
- Envelope seals when printing
- Error message about reading the flash drive appears
- Incorrect characters print
- Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
- Large jobs do not collate
- Multiple-language PDF files do not print
- Print job takes longer than expected
- Print jobs do not print
- Printing slows down
- Tray linking does not work
- Unexpected page breaks occur
- Hardware and internal option problems
- Paper feed problems
- Print quality problems
- Characters have jagged or uneven edges
- Clipped pages or images
- Compressed images appear on prints
- Gray background on prints
- Horizontal voids appear on prints
- Incorrect margins on prints
- Paper curl
- Print irregularities
- Print is too dark
- Print is too light
- Printer is printing blank pages
- Printer is printing solid black pages
- Repeating defects appear on prints
- Shadow images appear on prints
- Skewed print
- Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
- Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
- Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
- Toner rubs off
- Toner specks appear on prints
- Transparency print quality is poor
- Uneven print density
- Vertical voids appear on prints
- Solving home screen application problems
- Embedded Web Server does not open
- Contacting customer support
- Understanding the printer messages
- Notices
- Product information
- Edition notice
- GOVERNMENT END USERS
- Trademarks
- Licensing notices
- Noise emission levels
- Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
- India E-Waste notice
- Product disposal
- Static sensitivity notice
- ENERGY STAR
- Temperature information
- Laser notice
- Laser advisory label
- Power consumption
- Patent acknowledgment
- Multiple model information
- STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS, LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUN ...
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
- 日本の VCCI 規定
- European Community (EC) directives conformity
- Model-specific information
- Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
- Japanese VCCI notice
- European Community (EC) directives conformity
- Radio interference notice
- Index
Lexmark MS811dn User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for MS811dn by Lexmark which is a product in the Laser Printers category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Contents
Safety information........................................................................................ 5
Conventions.......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Overview........................................................................................................ 7
Using this guide....................................................................................................................................................7
Finding information about the printer.............................................................................................................7
Selecting a location for the printer.............................................................9
Additional printer setup.............................................................................. 11
Installing internal options.................................................................................................................................. 11
Installing hardware options............................................................................................................................ 28
Attaching cables................................................................................................................................................ 32
Setting up the printer software...................................................................................................................... 34
Networking..........................................................................................................................................................35
Verifying printer setup......................................................................................................................................39
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn...................... 40
Learning about the printer.............................................................................................................................. 40
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................................................................. 43
Printing.................................................................................................................................................................65
Managing your printer.......................................................................................................................................71
Using MS810de............................................................................................81
Learning about the printer............................................................................................................................... 81
Setting up and using the home screen applications................................................................................87
Loading paper and specialty media.............................................................................................................. 91
Printing..................................................................................................................................................................111
Managing your printer..................................................................................................................................... 118
Using MS812de......................................................................................... 128
Learning about the printer.............................................................................................................................128
Setting up and using the home screen applications..............................................................................135
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................................................................139
Printing................................................................................................................................................................160
Contents 2
Managing your printer.................................................................................................................................... 166
Paper and specialty media guide............................................................176
Using specialty media.....................................................................................................................................176
Paper guidelines...............................................................................................................................................178
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights...............................................................................................181
Understanding the printer menus.......................................................... 187
Menus list........................................................................................................................................................... 187
Paper menu....................................................................................................................................................... 188
Reports menu....................................................................................................................................................199
Network/Ports menu......................................................................................................................................200
Security menu...................................................................................................................................................213
Settings menu...................................................................................................................................................218
Help menu........................................................................................................................................................ 243
Saving money and the environment..................................................... 245
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display.......................................................................................245
Saving paper and toner.................................................................................................................................245
Recycling...........................................................................................................................................................246
Maintaining the printer............................................................................248
Ordering supplies........................................................................................................................................... 248
Storing supplies................................................................................................................................................251
Replacing supplies.......................................................................................................................................... 251
Cleaning printer parts.................................................................................................................................... 257
Moving the printer.......................................................................................................................................... 259
Clearing jams............................................................................................ 262
Avoiding jams.................................................................................................................................................. 262
Identifying jam locations............................................................................................................................... 264
Paper jam in the front door.......................................................................................................................... 266
Paper jam in the rear door............................................................................................................................267
Paper jam in the standard bin......................................................................................................................270
Paper jam in the duplex unit........................................................................................................................ 270
Paper jam in trays.............................................................................................................................................271
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder.......................................................................................................272
Paper jam in the staple finisher................................................................................................................... 273
Contents 3
Staple jam in the finisher...............................................................................................................................275
Paper jam in the output expander..............................................................................................................278
Paper jam in the mailbox...............................................................................................................................279
Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 281
Understanding the printer messages.........................................................................................................281
Solving printer problems.............................................................................................................................. 300
Solving home screen application problems............................................................................................ 336
Embedded Web Server does not open.....................................................................................................337
Contacting customer support...................................................................................................................... 338
Notices....................................................................................................... 339
Product information........................................................................................................................................339
Edition notice................................................................................................................................................... 339
Power consumption........................................................................................................................................343
Index........................................................................................................... 351
Contents 4
Safety information
Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Dierent types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product near
water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or
performance of procedures other than those specified in the User’s Guide may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release
emissions. You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for
selecting print media to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
This equipment is not suitable for use in locations where children are likely to be present.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Safety information 5
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If two or more optional finishers are installed, then remove the finishers individually from the printer.
Notes:
–Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first.
–To remove the finisher, hold the finisher on both sides, and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher.
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
Note: Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into
place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, make sure that all external
connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system connections) are properly installed in their marked
plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer
is not responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power
cord. Do not subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects
such as furniture and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect
the power cord regularly for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet
before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling connections,
such as a power cord, a fax feature or USB cable, during a lightning storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 6
Overview
Using this guide
This User’s Guide provides general and specific information on using the printer models that are listed on the
cover page.
The following chapters contain information applicable to all printer models:
•Safety information
•Selecting a location for the printer
•Additional printer setup
•Paper and specialty media guide
•Understanding printer menus
•Saving money and the environment
•Maintaining the printer
•Clearing jams
•Troubleshooting
To find instructions for your printer:
•Use the table of contents.
•Use the Search function or the Find toolbar of your application to search for page content.
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation
came with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The
guides are available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available
at http://support.lexmark.com.
Overview 7
What are you looking for? Find it here
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending
on your operating system.
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation
for your country or region can be found on the
support Web site or on the printed warranty that came
with your printer.
Record the following information (located on the
store receipt and at the back of the printer), and have
it ready when you contact customer support so that
they may serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited
Warranty included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Overview 8
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to
install any hardware options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature ‑40 to 60°C (-40 to 140°F)
1Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4Rear 152 mm (6 in.)
5Top 115 mm (4.5 in.)
Selecting a location for the printer 9
1Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4Rear 152 mm (6 in.)
5Top 115 mm (4.5 in.)
1Right side 152 mm (6 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 152 mm (6 in.)
4Rear 152 mm (6 in.)
5Top 115 mm (4.5 in.)
Selecting a location for the printer 10
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR3 DIMM
–Flash memory
•Fonts
•Firmware cards
–Forms and Bar Code
–PRESCRIBE
–IPDS
•Printer hard disk
•LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
–Parallel 1284-B interface
–MarkNetTM N8350 802.11 b/g/n wireless printer server
–RS-232-C serial interface
Accessing the controller board
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Remove the controller board access cover.
1
2
Additional printer setup 11
2Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the controller board shield.
3Remove the shield.
Additional printer setup 12
4Use the following illustration to locate the appropriate connector:
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic
component or connector.
1
3
2
1Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or printer hard disk connector
2Option card connector
3Memory card connector
Additional printer setup 13
5Align the screws with the holes on the shield, and then reattach the shield.
6Tighten the screws on the shield.
Additional printer setup 14
7Reattach the access cover.
2
1
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the controller board.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 11.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so
may cause damage.
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
1
2
Additional printer setup 15
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall
until it clicks into place.
5Reattach the controller board shield, and then the controller board access cover.
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The controller board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 11.
2If an optional printer hard disk is installed, then remove the printer hard disk first.
For more information, see “Removing a printer hard disk” on page 26.
Additional printer setup 16
3Unpack the ISP kit.
2
3
4
1
1ISP solution
2Screw for attaching the plastic bracket to the ISP
3Screws for attaching the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield
4Plastic bracket
4Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
aLoosen the screw.
bLift the metal cover, and then pull it out completely.
Additional printer setup 17
1 2 3
5Align the posts of the plastic bracket with the holes on the controller board cage, and then press the plastic
bracket on the controller board cage until it clicks into place. Make sure the cables are neatly tucked under
the plastic bracket.
6Install the ISP on the plastic bracket.
Note: Hold the ISP at an angle over the plastic bracket so that any overhanging connectors will pass
through the ISP opening in the controller board cage.
Additional printer setup 18
7Lower the ISP toward the plastic bracket until the ISP is seated between the guides of the plastic bracket.
8Use the provided thumbscrew for the ISP to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP.
Note: Turn the screw clockwise, enough to hold the ISP in place, but do not tighten it yet.
Additional printer setup 19
9Attach the two provided screws to secure the ISP mounting bracket to the controller board shield.
10 Tighten the thumbscrew that is attached to the ISP.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not screw it on too tightly.
11 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color-coded.
Additional printer setup 20
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then
turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 11.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
1
2
4Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Additional printer setup 21
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller
board.
5Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually
add the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 34.
Installing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch something metal on the printer first before touching any controller board electronic
components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 11.
2Unpack the printer hard disk.
Additional printer setup 22
3Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board cage.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Additional printer setup 23
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
aRemove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
bAlign the standos of the printer hard disk to the holes in the ISP, and then press the printer hard disk
down until the standos are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press
on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
cInsert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 24
4Align the standos of the printer hard disk to the holes in the controller board cage, and then press the
printer hard disk down until the standos are in place.
Installation warning: Hold only the edges of the printed circuit board assembly. Do not touch or press on
the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage.
Note: Make sure the cables are neatly tucked under the printer hard disk.
5Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Additional printer setup 25
Removing a printer hard disk
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Additional printer setup 26
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static
electricity. Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components
or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 11.
2Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the controller board, leaving the cable attached to the
printer hard disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage
the latch before pulling out the cable.
3Remove the screws holding the printer hard disk in place.
Additional printer setup 27
4Remove the printer hard disk.
5Set aside the printer hard disk.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any hardware options you have purchased in the following order:
•Caster base
•2100‑sheet tray or spacer
•Optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray
•Printer
For more information on installing a caster base, optional 550‑ or 250‑sheet tray, spacer, or 2100‑sheet tray,
see the setup sheet that came with the option.
Additional printer setup 28
Installing optional trays
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware
or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer o, and unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer,
then turn them o as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1Turn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
3Pull out the tray completely from the base.
4Remove any packing material from inside the tray.
5Insert the tray into the base.
6Place the tray near the printer.
7Align the optional tray with the caster base.
Note: Make sure to lock the wheels of the caster base to secure the printer.
Additional printer setup 29
8Align the printer with the tray, and then slowly lower the printer into place.
Note: Optional trays lock together when stacked.
Additional printer setup 30
9Connect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the
printer.
Additional printer setup 31
Note: When the printer software and any optional trays are installed, you may need to manually add the
options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 34.
To uninstall the optional trays, slide the latch on the right side of the printer toward the front of the printer until
it clicks into place, and then remove stacked trays one at a time from the top to the bottom.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not set up this product or make any electrical or cabling
connections, such as a power cord, a fax feature, or USB cable, during a lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
•The appropriate parallel cable with the parallel port
Additional printer setup 32
1
2
3
4
6
5
Use the To
1Parallel port Connect the printer to a computer.
Note: This can also be used in installing an optional Internal Solutions Port
(ISP).
2USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter.
3Ethernet port Connect the printer to a network.
4USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer.
5Security slot Attach a lock that will secure the controller board.
6Printer power cord socket Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, or the printer in the
area shown while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Note: This feature is available only if you purchase optional trays and a caster base.
After attaching the Ethernet cable and power cord, neatly tuck the cables in the channels at the back of the printer.
Additional printer setup 33
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
•From the software CD that came with your printer.
•Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then select your printer and operating system.
2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
2Select the printer you want to update, and then do the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
Additional printer setup 34
3Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3Apply the changes.
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNet N8350 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless
network. For information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came
with the adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP),
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X-RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you
begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing
the printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can
choose to use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer
can physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems
caused by a damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Additional printer setup 35
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if
you are not sure which channel to select.
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the
key currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must
be set for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate
on the network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless
utility of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID
or the security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access
point, or contact your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation
that came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or
consult your system support person.
Connecting the printer to a network using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•The Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to one of the following:
– > Settings > > Network/Ports > > Active NIC > > Auto >
– > Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto
Additional printer setup 36
– > Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto > Submit
Note: Make sure to turn o the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn on the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to one of the following:
• > Settings > > Network/Ports > > Network [x] > > Network [x] Setup > > Wireless
> > Wireless Connection Setup >
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually enter the SSID.
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Wi-Fi Protected
Setup
Before connecting the printer to a wireless network, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1Depending on your printer model, navigate to either of the following:
• > Settings > > Networks/Ports > > Network [x] > > Network [x] Setup > >
Wireless > > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > > Start Push Button Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start
Push Button Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start
Push Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Additional printer setup 37
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1Depending on your printer model, navigate to either of the following:
• > Settings > > Networks/Ports > > Network [x] > > Network [x] Setup > >
Wireless > > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > > Start PIN Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start
PIN Method
• > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wi‑Fi Protected Setup > Start
PIN Method
2Copy the eight–digit WPS PIN.
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access
point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web
Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network
mode, and channel.
4Click Submit.
5Turn o the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then
turn the printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Additional printer setup 38
Setting up serial printing (Windows only)
1Set the parameters in the printer.
aFrom the control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
bLocate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings, if necessary.
cApply the changes.
2From your computer, open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
3Open the printer properties, and then select the COM port from the list.
4Set the COM port parameters in Device Manager.
Notes:
•Serial printing reduces printing speed.
•Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the serial port on your printer.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set
up correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed
options appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed
correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
For more information, see the following:
–“Printing a menu settings page” on page 73 for non‑touch‑screen printer models
–“Printing a menu settings page” on page 120 or “Printing a menu settings page” on page 168 for
touch‑screen printer models
•Network setup page—Use this page to verify the network connection. This page also provides important
information that aids network printing configuration.
Note: Make sure your printer has Ethernet or wireless capability and is attached to a network.
For more information, see the following:
–“Printing a network setup page” on page 73 for non‑touch‑screen printer models
–“Printing a network setup page” on page 120 or “Printing a network setup page” on page 168 for
touch‑screen printer models
Additional printer setup 39
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn,
MS812dn
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Basic model
1Standard bin
2Printer control panel
3Multipurpose feeder
4Standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
Fully configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 40
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the
printer. For more information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher •Output expander
•4‑bin mailbox
•Staple, hole punch finisher
24‑bin mailbox •Staple finisher
•Staple, hole punch finisher
•Output expander
3Caster base None
42100‑sheet tray None
5550‑sheet tray 250‑sheet tray
6250‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray
74‑bin mailbox Output expander
8Output expander 4‑bin mailbox
The staple, hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options.
In a configuration with two or more optional finishers:
•The staple finisher must always be on top.
•The high‑capacity output expander must always be at the bottom.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 41
•The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high‑capacity output expander.
•The output expander and mailbox may be installed in any order.
When using optional trays:
•Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100‑sheet tray.
•The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
•A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer.
•The optional 250‑ and 550‑sheet trays may be installed in any order.
Using the printer control panel
12345
6
7
8
9
10
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Select button Submit changes made in the printer settings.
3Arrow buttons Scroll up and down or left and right.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Press any hard button.
•Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•Open a door or cover.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
6Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
7Back button Return to the previous screen.
8Home button Go to the home screen.
9Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 42
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can aect how reliably documents print. For more
information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 262 and “Storing paper” on page 180.
Setting the paper size and type
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Paper Size/Type >
2Press the up or down arrow button to select the tray or feeder, and then press .
3Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper size, and then press .
4Press the up or down arrow button to select the paper type, and then press to change the settings.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 43
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided
printing.
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
•If you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper, then you may use the MS710 Series printer models,
which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed. For more information on the
MS710 Series printer models, contact your Lexmark sales representative.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Universal Setup > > Units of Measure > > select unit of
measure >
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•When loading folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out completely.
•Avoid removing trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 44
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 45
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the
paper being loaded.
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 46
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 47
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on
the left side of the tray.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 48
•Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 49
•When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the
dashed line, which is the alternate paper fill indicator.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then
lock the length guide.
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 50
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 51
bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 52
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 53
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length
guide is not attached, then proceed to step d.
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 54
dSqueeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until
it clicks into place.
3Flex and fan the sheets to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways for loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 55
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 56
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 57
6From the printer control panel, set the size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 58
2Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 59
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
5Load paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 60
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 61
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6For custom- or Universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 62
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty,
paper feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 43.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 63
Using the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a new custom paper type name.
3Press .
4Press Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Paper Menu > > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Press .
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 64
Printing
Printing a document
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2If necessary, adjust the settings.
3Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > Print Settings > > Quality Menu > > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the toner darkness, and then press .
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 65
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer
control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer control panel and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is
installed.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After
these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the
flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively
printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 66
2From the printer control panel, select the document you want to print.
3Press the left or right arrow button to specify the number of copies for printing, and then press .
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then access held
jobs from the printer control panel to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.ti or .tif
•.webp
•.fls
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 67
Printing from a mobile device
Note: Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud PrintTM is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print
to any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Note: This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3Tap Print, and then select the printer.
4Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Print
Lexmark Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a Lexmark device.
1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2Select a device.
3Print the document.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 68
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Security > > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Print job type Description
Max Invalid PIN Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the
printer control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Verify Job Expiration Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print
job is automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are
printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held
until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Press .
Printing held jobs
1From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2Select the printer, and then do either of the following:
•For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
•For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3Select the print job type.
4If necessary, assign a user name.
5Send the print job.
6From the printer home screen, select Held Jobs.
7Send the print job.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 69
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Reports > > Print Fonts
2Press the up or down arrow button to select the font setting.
3Press .
Note: The PPDS fonts appear only when the PPDS data stream is activated.
Printing a directory list
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Reports > > Print Directory >
Note: The Print Directory menu item appears only when an optional flash memory or printer hard disk is
installed.
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, press .
2When a list of print jobs appears, select the job to cancel, and then press .
3Press to go back to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 70
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Accessing the remote control panel
The remote control panel on your computer screen lets you interact with the printer control panel, even when
you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status
and do print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at the network printer.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP
section. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as
123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Press Enter to open the Web page of your printer.
3Click Applications.
Note: The remote control panel requires a Java plug‑in to launch.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 71
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry
attempts, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified
time, all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click the Copy Printer Settings.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 72
3To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit
language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Printing a menu settings page
Print a menu settings page to review the current menu settings and to verify if the printer options are installed
correctly.
Note: If you have not changed any menu settings, then the menu settings page lists all the factory default
settings. When you select and save other settings from the menus, they replace the factory default settings
as user default settings. A user default setting remains in eect until you access the menu again, choose
another value, and save it.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Reports > > Menu Settings Page >
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Reports > > Network Setup Page >
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and then confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup
page.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Notes:
•Each gauge shows the estimated life left for the supply or part.
•All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of a letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Status/Supplies > View Supplies >
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 73
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3Select a setting.
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
•Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory
default settings.
•O supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a
short delay before the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•The printer display is turned o when the printer is in Sleep mode.
•Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned o when the printer is
in Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4Click Submit.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 74
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce the printer noise.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings > > Quiet Mode >
2Select a setting.
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There is a short delay
before the first page is printed.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned o.
•The printer ignores the Advance Start command.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3Press .
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings > > Timeouts > > Sleep Mode >
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 75
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings >
2Select Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button, and then press .
3Press Hibernate > .
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 73.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 78.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > > Settings > > General Settings > > Factory Defaults > > Restore Now
>
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 76
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is
attached, the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be
removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 77
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, turn o the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe All Settings appears.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 78
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Press the up or down arrow button until Wipe Disk appears, and then select one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Press the up or down arrow button until Yes appears, and then proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 79
3From the Disk Encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Navigate to:
Disk Encryption > Enable
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Select Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn o the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the screen for enabling or disabling disk encryption.
5Navigate to:
Back > Exit Config Menu
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Using MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn 80
Using MS810de
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Basic model
1Standard bin
2Printer control panel
3Multipurpose feeder
4Standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
Fully configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Using MS810de 81
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the
printer. For more information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher •Output expander
•4‑bin mailbox
•Staple, hole punch finisher
24‑bin mailbox •Staple finisher
•Staple, hole punch finisher
•Output expander
3Caster base None
42100‑sheet tray None
5550‑sheet tray 250‑sheet tray
6250‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray
74‑bin mailbox Output expander
8Output expander 4‑bin mailbox
Using MS810de 82
The staple, hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options.
•In a configuration with three optional finishers, the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any
order.
•In a configuration with two optional finishers:
–The staple finisher must always be on top.
–The high‑capacity output expander must always be at the bottom.
–The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high‑capacity output expander.
•When using optional trays:
–Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100‑sheet tray.
–The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
–A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer.
–The optional 250‑ and 550‑sheet trays may be installed in any order.
Using the printer control panel
1234
5
6
7
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep Mode:
•Press any hard button.
•Pull out Tray 1 or load paper in the multipurpose feeder.
•Open a door or cover.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to the USB port on the printer.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
5Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
6Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
Using MS810de 83
Use the To
7USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home
screen buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
1234
5
6
7
8
Using MS810de 84
Tou ch To
1Change Language Change the primary language of the printer.
2Bookmarks Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URLs) into a tree view of folders and
file links.
Note: The tree view does not include bookmarks created within Forms and
Favorites, and the ones in the tree are not usable in Forms and Favorites.
3Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
4USB View, select, or print photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This icon appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory
card or flash drive is connected to the printer.
5Menus Access printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
6Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show the status of printer supplies.
•Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention
to continue processing.
•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
8Tips View a context‑sensitive help information.
These may also appear on the home screen:
Tou ch To
Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user.
Profiles and Apps Access profiles and applications.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen. You can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web
Server to view and remotely configure printer settings.
Using MS810de 85
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
12
3
4
5
Tou ch the To
1Radio button Select or clear an item.
2Up arrow Scroll up.
3Down arrow Scroll down.
4Accept button Save a setting.
5Cancel button •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Return to the previous screen.
Tou ch To
Return to the home screen.
Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel.
Scroll to the left.
Scroll to the right.
Using MS810de 86
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3Look for the IP address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Using MS810de 87
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 88 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 87.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Using Background and Idle Screen
Icon Description
The application lets you customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Change Background > select background to use
2Tou ch .
Using MS810de 88
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms
directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 87.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Understanding Eco‑Settings
Icon Description
The application lets you easily manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage
settings to help reduce the environmental impact of your printer.
Using MS810de 89
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other
printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration
file is saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file
that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the
instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved
configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
Using MS810de 90
3Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can aect how reliably documents print. For more
information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 262 and “Storing paper” on page 180.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the
printer menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided
printing.
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
•If you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper, then you may use the MS710 Series printer models,
which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed. For more information on the
MS710 Series printer models, contact your Lexmark sales representative.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Tou ch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch .
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•When loading folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and pull it out completely.
Using MS810de 91
•Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810de 92
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the
paper being loaded.
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810de 93
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
Using MS810de 94
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
Using MS810de 95
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on
the left side of the tray.
•Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
Using MS810de 96
•When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the
dashed line, which is the alternate paper fill indicator.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then
lock the length guide.
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS810de 97
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS810de 98
bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Using MS810de 99
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, Oficio‑, and Folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS810de 100
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length
guide is not attached, then proceed to step d.
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
Using MS810de 101
dSqueeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until
it clicks into place.
3Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Using MS810de 102
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS810de 103
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Using MS810de 104
6From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Using MS810de 105
2Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides.
Using MS810de 106
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
5Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.
Using MS810de 107
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS810de 108
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6For custom- or Universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS810de 109
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 91.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
Using MS810de 110
3Tou ch .
4Tou ch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Tou ch .
Printing
Printing a document
Printing from a computer
Note: For labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the printer before sending the
print job.
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2If necessary, adjust the settings.
3Send the print job.
Using MS810de 111
Printing forms
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select form > Print
2If necessary, configure the print settings.
3Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the setting, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Ton er Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch .
Using MS810de 112
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer
control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After
these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the
flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printer or the flash drive in the area shown while actively
printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. Loss of data can occur.
Using MS810de 113
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.ti or .tif
•.webp
•.fls
Using MS810de 114
Printing from a mobile device
Note: Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Before printing, make sure that the Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print to
any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Note: This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3Tap Print, and then select the printer.
4Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Print
Lexmark Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a Lexmark device.
1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2Select a device.
3Print the document.
Using MS810de 115
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select a print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It lets you
examine if the first copy is satisfactory or not. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory when all copies are
printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Tou ch .
Printing held jobs
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2Select the printer, and then do either of the following:
•For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
•For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3Select the print job type.
4If necessary, assign a user name.
5Send the print job.
6From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7Send the print job.
Using MS810de 116
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs, or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch .
3Press on the keypad to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Using MS810de 117
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e‑mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Using MS810de 118
Notification Description
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an e‑mail about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The supply
must be replaced to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Modifying confidential print settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that
user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Click Submit to save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop‑down menu, and then click Click here to submit
language.
4Click Printer Settings.
Using MS810de 119
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers.
Note: If you want to add or remove target printers, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup
page.
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Notes:
•Each gauge shows the estimated life left for the supply or part.
•All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of a letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Using MS810de 120
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3Select a setting.
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
•Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory
default settings.
•O supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a
short delay before the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•The printer display is turned o when the printer is in Sleep mode.
•Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned o when the printer is
in Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using MS810de 121
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There is a short delay
before the first page is printed.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned o.
•The printer ignores the Advance Start command.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
4Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2Tou ch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3Tou ch Hibernate > .
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 120.
Using MS810de 122
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 125.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is
attached, the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be
removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Using MS810de 123
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory
(RAM) to temporarily buer user data during simple print
jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, simply turn o the printer.
Using MS810de 124
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen
with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Tou ch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3Tou ch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using MS810de 125
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Tou ch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn o the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Using MS810de 126
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Using MS810de 127
Using MS812de
Learning about the printer
Printer configurations
Basic model
1Standard bin
2Printer control panel
3Multipurpose feeder
4Standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1)
Fully configured model
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability.
You must use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you
purchased a printer with a similar configuration, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Using MS812de 128
The following illustration shows the maximum number of optional finishers and trays that are supported by the
printer. For more information on other configurations, visit www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Hardware option Alternative hardware option
1Staple finisher •Output expander
•4‑bin mailbox
•Staple, hole punch finisher
24‑bin mailbox •Staple finisher
•Staple, hole punch finisher
•Output expander
3Caster base None
42100‑sheet tray None
5550‑sheet tray 250‑sheet tray
6250‑sheet tray 550‑sheet tray
74‑bin mailbox Output expander
8Output expander 4‑bin mailbox
Using MS812de 129
The staple, hole punch finisher must not be combined with any other output options.
•In a configuration with three optional finishers, the output expander and mailbox may be installed in any
order.
•In a configuration with two optional finishers:
–The staple finisher must always be on top.
–The high‑capacity output expander must always be at the bottom.
–The output expander is the only option that can be placed on top of the high‑capacity output expander.
•When using optional trays:
–Always use a caster base when the printer is configured with a 2100‑sheet tray.
–The 2100‑sheet tray must always be at the bottom of a configuration.
–A maximum of four optional trays may be configured with the printer.
–The optional 250‑ and 550‑sheet trays may be installed in any order.
Using the printer control panel
4
123
5
6
7
Use the To
1Display •View the status of the printer.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Do the following to wake the printer from Sleep mode:
•Press and release the Sleep button.
•Touch the screen or press any hard button.
•Open a tray, cover, or door.
•Send a print job from the computer.
•Perform a power‑on reset with the main power switch.
•Attach a device to a USB port.
4Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the printer.
5Stop or Cancel button Stop all printer activity.
6Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
Using MS812de 130
Use the To
7USB port Connect a USB Bluetooth adapter or a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the printer control panel signify a certain printer status
or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
O The printer is o or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
O The printer is o, idle or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely o for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home
screen buttons and icons to initiate an action.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.
1234
5
6
7
8
Using MS812de 131
Tou ch To
1Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
2Held Jobs Display all current held jobs.
3Forms and Favorites Access frequently used online forms.
4Eco‑Settings Adjust energy consumption, noise, toner and paper usage.
5Menus Access printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in Ready state.
6Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer conditions such as Imaging unit low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires
intervention to continue processing.
•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
8Tips Open a context‑sensitive Help information on the printer control panel.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert If an attendance message aects a function, then this icon appears and the
red indicator light blinks.
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the
home screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You
can use the IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can
view and remotely configure printer settings even when you are not physically
near the printer.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Using MS812de 132
123
4
5
6
7
8
Tou ch To
1Left arrow Scroll to the left.
2Right arrow Scroll to the right.
3Up arrow Scroll up.
4Down arrow Scroll down.
5Submit Submit changes made in the printer settings.
6Back Return to the previous screen.
7Home Return to the home screen.
8Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog on the printer control panel.
Using MS812de 133
Other touch-screen buttons
Tou ch To
Accept Save settings.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Leave a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Increase Select a higher value.
Decrease Select a lower value.
Exit Leave the current screen.
Search Search current held jobs.
Warning View a warning or error message.
Using MS812de 134
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3Look for the IP address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings
even when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Using MS812de 135
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home
screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home
screen applications” on page 136 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you
must first activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on
accessing the Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 87.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Using Background and Idle Screen
Use To
Customize the background and idle screen of your printer home screen.
From the home screen, navigate to:
Change Background > select background to use > Apply
Using MS812de 136
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this
application. To check for updates of this User’s Guide, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the
documentation that came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the
host computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 87.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Understanding Eco‑Settings
Use To
Manage energy consumption, noise, toner, and paper usage settings to help reduce the
environmental impact of your printer.
Using MS812de 137
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other
printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2To export or import a configuration for one application, do the following:
aClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management.
bFrom the list of installed applications, click the name of the application you want to configure.
cClick Configure, and then do either of the following:
•To export a configuration to a file, click Export, and then follow the instructions on the computer
screen to save the configuration file.
Notes:
–When saving the configuration file, you can type a unique file name or use the default name.
–If a "JVM Out of Memory” error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration
file is saved.
•To import a configuration from a file, click Import, and then browse to the saved configuration file
that was exported from a previously configured printer.
Notes:
–Before importing the configuration file, you can choose to preview it first or load it directly.
–If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click
Apply.
3To export or import a configuration for multiple applications, do the following:
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bDo either of the following:
•To export a configuration file, click Export Embedded Solutions Settings File, and then follow the
instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file.
•To import a configuration file, do the following:
1Click Import Embedded Solutions Settings File > Choose File, and then browse to the saved
configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer.
2Click Submit.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near
the network printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create
bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
Using MS812de 138
3Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can aect how reliably documents print. For more
information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 262 and “Storing paper” on page 180.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select a paper size or type > Submit
Notes:
•The paper size is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
multipurpose feeder.
•The paper size for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
•The paper type must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
Configuring Universal paper settings
Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 70 x 127 mm (2.76 x 5 inches) for one‑sided printing and
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) for two‑sided (duplex) printing.
•The largest supported Universal size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) for one‑sided and two‑sided
printing.
•When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
•If you regularly print large jobs on narrow paper, then you may use the MS710 Series printer models,
which print batches of 10 or more pages of narrow paper at a faster speed. For more information on the
MS710 Series printer models, contact your Lexmark sales representative.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Tou ch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch Submit.
Using MS812de 139
Loading the 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
Notes:
•When loading folio‑, legal‑, or Oficio‑size paper, lift the tray slightly and then pull it out completely.
•Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
Using MS812de 140
2Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until it clicks
into place.
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS812de 141
3Unlock the length guide, and then squeeze and slide the guide to the correct position for the size of the
paper being loaded.
Notes:
•Lock the length guide for all paper sizes.
•Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
Using MS812de 142
4Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
5Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper or envelope is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS812de 143
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•If you are loading envelopes, then make sure that the flap side is facing up and the envelopes are on
the left side of the tray.
Using MS812de 144
•Make sure the paper is below the solid line, which is the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
Using MS812de 145
•When using card stock, labels, or other types of specialty media, make sure the paper is below the
dashed line, which is the alternate paper fill indicator.
6For custom‑ or Universal‑size paper, adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then
lock the length guide.
7Insert the tray.
8From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS812de 146
Loading the 2100‑sheet tray
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray.
2Adjust the width and length guides.
Loading A5‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the position for A5.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS812de 147
bSqueeze and slide the length guide to the position for A5 until it clicks into place.
12
cRemove the A5 length guide from its holder.
12
dInsert the A5 length guide into its designated slot.
Note: Press the A5 length guide until it clicks into place.
Using MS812de 148
Loading A4‑, letter‑, legal‑, oficio‑, and folio‑size paper
aPull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
1
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
2
LGL
OFC
FOLIO
LTR
A4
A5
Using MS812de 149
bIf the A5 length guide is still attached to the length guide, then remove it from its place. If the A5 length
guide is not attached, then proceed to step d.
cPut the A5 length guide in its holder.
2
1
Using MS812de 150
dSqueeze the length guide and slide it to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded until
it clicks into place.
3Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
4Load the paper stack with the printable side facedown.
Note: Make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Using MS812de 151
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS812de 152
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the tray can cause paper jams.
5Insert the tray.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Using MS812de 153
6From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
Note: Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Using MS812de 154
2Using the handle, pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
3Slide the width guide to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of tray to help position the guides.
Using MS812de 155
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
4Prepare the paper or specialty media for loading.
•Flex sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of the transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on
a level surface.
5Load the paper or specialty media.
Note: Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
•Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
•Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder, lies flat and is not bent or wrinkled.
Using MS812de 156
•There are dierent ways of loading letterhead depending on whether an optional staple finisher is
installed or not.
Without an optional staple finisher With an optional staple finisher
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
One‑sided printing
ABC
Two‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the
long edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray.
One‑sided printing Two‑sided printing
ABC
Note: If the holes on the long edge of the paper are on the left side of the tray, then a jam may occur.
Using MS812de 157
•Load envelopes with the flap side down and on the left of the multipurpose feeder.
B5
EXEC
A4 A5
LTR
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated
linings, or self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
•Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overfilling the feeder can cause paper jams.
6For custom- or Universal-size paper, adjust the width guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Set the correct paper size and type to avoid paper jams and print quality problems.
Using MS812de 158
Linking and unlinking trays
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more
information, see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 139.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the
printer. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur
if settings are not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3Tou ch Submit.
4Tou ch Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using MS812de 159
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type.
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Tou ch Submit.
Printing
Printing a document
Printing from a computer
Note: For specialty media such as labels, card stock, and envelopes, set the paper size and type in the
printer before sending the print job.
1From the document that you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2If necessary, adjust the settings.
3Send the print job.
Printing forms
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select form > Print
2If necessary, configure the print settings.
Using MS812de 160
3Send the print job.
Adjusting toner darkness
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the toner darkness, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer
control panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
Using MS812de 161
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred,
then the printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After
these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the
flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector,
the memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the
memory device. Loss of data can occur.
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held
Jobs on the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not
supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New
Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Using MS812de 162
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.ti or .tif
•.webp
•.fls
Printing from a mobile device
Note: Make sure that the printer and mobile device share the same wireless network. For information on
configuring the wireless settings of your mobile device, see the documentation that came with the device.
Printing from a mobile device using Mopria Print Service
Mopria® Print Service is a mobile printing solution for mobile devices running on Android version 4.4 or later. It
allows you to print directly to any Mopria‑certified printer.
Note: Before printing, make sure that Mopria Print Service is enabled.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a mobile printing service that allows enabled applications on mobile devices to print to
any Google Cloud Print‑ready printer.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch an enabled application.
2Tap Print, and then select the printer.
3Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using AirPrint
AirPrint is a mobile printing solution that allows you to print directly from Apple devices to an AirPrint‑certified
printer.
Using MS812de 163
Note: This application is supported only in some Apple devices.
1From the home screen of your mobile device, launch a compatible application.
2Select an item to print, and then tap the share icon.
3Tap Print, and then select the printer.
4Send the print job.
Printing from a mobile device using Lexmark Print
Lexmark Print allows you to send documents and images directly to a Lexmark device.
1Open the document, and then send or share the document to Lexmark Print.
Note: Some third‑party applications may not support the send or share feature. For more information, see
the documentation that came with the application.
2Select a device.
3Print the document.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select the print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and
PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 1–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It allows you
to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is automatically
deleted from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Using MS812de 164
Use To
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the
printer control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Tou ch Submit.
Printing held jobs
1From the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog.
2Select the printer, and then do the following:
•For Windows users, click Properties or Preferences, and then click Print and Hold.
•For Macintosh users, select Print and Hold.
3Select the print job type.
4If necessary, assign a user name.
5Send the print job.
6From the printer home screen, touch Held Jobs.
7Send the print job.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Tou ch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Using MS812de 165
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, touch Cancel Job or press on the keypad.
2Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Managing your printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced
system support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded
Web Server — Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Using MS812de 166
Notes:
•Selectable alerts can be set on the toner cartridge, imaging unit, and maintenance kit.
•All selectable alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all selectable
alerts can be set for the end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail selectable alert is available for all supply
conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for
some supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
O The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of
the supply will appear on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer displays the warning message and generates an email about the status
of the supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached, and the user
needs to press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced
to continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Modifying confidential print settings
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
Using MS812de 167
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that
user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Click Submit to save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop‑down menu, and then click Click here to submit
language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers.
Note: If you want to add or remove target printers, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This
page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be
malfunctioning. Consult your system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup
page.
Using MS812de 168
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the printer display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is
required.
Notes:
•Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part.
•All page life estimates for supplies assume printing on a single side of letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > View Supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure that the computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using MS812de 169
Use To
O Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode.
Notes:
•Settings that were changed when other modes were selected are reset to the factory
default settings.
•O supports the performance specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
Notes:
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document is ready to print. You may notice a
short delay before the first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
•The printer display is turned o when the printer is in Sleep mode.
•Lights on the staple finisher and other optional finishers are turned o when the printer is
in Sleep mode.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) printing feature.
4Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode.
3Select a setting.
Using MS812de 170
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs process at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a
document is ready to print. There is a short delay
before the first page is printed.
•The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned o.
•The printer will ignore the Advance Start
command.
O Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
4Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power operating mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long
press of the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2From the “Press Sleep Button” or “Press and Hold Sleep Button” menu, select Hibernate, and then touch
Submit.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before
restoring the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 168.
Using MS812de 171
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the
Wipe All Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 173.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory
default settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port
menu settings. All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a
printer hard disk are not aected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. When a lock compatible with most laptop computers is
attached, the printer is locked. When locked, the controller board shield and the controller board cannot be
removed. Attach a security lock to the printer in the location shown.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM)
to temporarily buer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used
to store the operating system, device settings, network
information, bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Using MS812de 172
Type of memory Description
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for device-specific functionality.
This lets the device retain buered user data from
complex print jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
•The printer is being moved to a dierent department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your
premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely
erased is to physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buered data, simply turn o the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following
these steps:
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Tou ch Wipe All Settings.
The printer restarts several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
Using MS812de 173
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential
material left by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3Tou ch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by
a verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely
erasing data from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Using MS812de 174
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard
disk is installed.
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn o the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress
bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is
fully turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Tou ch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Tou ch Ye s to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn o the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the
printer will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Tou ch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data
stored in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Using MS812de 175
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or control panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content,
thickness, and texture, can significantly aect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
card stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly aect the print quality and cause jams or other paper
feed problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges
on a level surface.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
Paper and specialty media guide 176
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex the stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and
then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal
envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
labels loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel o during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial
sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner
cartridge warranties.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Vinyl and polyester labels are supported only in the MS710 Series printer models.
Tips on using transparencies
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex and fan the sheets to prevent them from sticking together.
•When printing on large volumes of transparencies, make sure to print by batches of only up to 20 with an
interval of at least three minutes between batches, to prevent the transparencies from sticking together in
the bin. You can also remove transparencies from the bin by batches of 20.
Paper and specialty media guide 177
Paper guidelines
Selecting the correct paper or specialty media reduces printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample
of the paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics aect print quality and reliability. Consider these factors before printing on
them:
Weight
The printer trays and multipurpose feeder can automatically feed paper weights between 60–176 g/m2 (16–
47‑lb) grain long paper. The 2100‑sheet tray can automatically feed paper weights up to 60–135 g/m2 (16–36‑lb)
grain long paper. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be sti enough to feed properly, and may cause
jams.
Note: Two‑sided printing is supported for 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can
occur after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper
unwrapped in hot, humid, cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to
printing and can cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly aects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper
is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300
Sheeld points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheeld points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper aects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes
that can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing.
Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very dierent from the printer
environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length
of the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–176 g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides
the paper with a high degree of stability, resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality.
Paper containing fibers such as cotton can negatively aect paper handling.
Paper and specialty media guide 178
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an oset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
•Use inks that are not aected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet
these requirements; latex inks might not.
•Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will aect print quality.
•When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other oce papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced
specifically for use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers
that represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted
with rigor and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including
the following:
•Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
•Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
•Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
•Bending resistance and proper stiness means optimum feeding through the printer.
•Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
•Surface roughness (measured in Sheeld units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
•Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
•Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it
moves through the printer)
•Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper aects the degree
of control over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally
responsible manner, they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as
colorants and “glue” often generates more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However,
using recycled papers enables better resource management overall.
Paper and specialty media guide 179
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its
products. To gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company
commissioned a number of life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor
(up to 80%) of carbon emissions caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This
is due to the energy-intensive manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled
paper is one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-
equipped to help customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages
purchasing paper from suppliers who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is
maintained. However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of
printing:
1Minimize paper consumption.
2Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These
certifications guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ
environmentally and socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight
paper, or recycled paper.
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be aected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (±
0.9 in.), such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with
a software application to successfully print on these forms.)
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can
be found at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent.
Most label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative
humidity between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Paper and specialty media guide 180
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and
wrapper help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and
weights of paper they support.
Paper types and weights supported by the printer
The printer engine supports 60–176‑g/m2 (16–47‑lb) paper weights.
Paper type 250‑ or 550‑sheet
trays
2100‑sheet tray Multipurpose feeder Duplex
Paper
Card stock X
Plain Envelope X X
Rough Envelope X X
Paper labels X X
Pharmacy labels X
Transparencies* X X
* Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 177.
Paper sizes supported by the printer
Note: When printing on paper less than 210 mm (8.3 inches) wide, the printer may print at a reduced speed
after a period of time to ensure the best print performance.
Paper and specialty media guide 181
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
A4 210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5 148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
2
A6 105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
X
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
X
Letter 216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive 184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
X
Oficio 216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio 216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement 140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X
Universal3105 x 148 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
X
70 x 127 mm to
216 x 356 mm
(2.76 x 5 to
8.5 x 14 in.)
XX X
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
X X
9 Envelope 98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
X X
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper
sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper
size is not available, then select Universal or turn o tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer
support.
2 Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length
is from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 182
Paper size1Dimensions Standard or
optional 250‑
or 550‑sheet
tray
Optional
2100‑sheet tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Duplex
10 Envelope 105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
X X
DL Envelope 110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
X X
C5 Envelope 162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
X X
B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
X X
Other Envelope 98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
X X
1 If your preferred default paper size cannot be set in the printer control panel, then you may select common paper
sizes that correspond to the position of the length guide in the tray from the Paper Size/Type menu. If the paper
size is not available, then select Universal or turn o tray size sensing. For more information, contact customer
support.
2 Paper is supported in long‑edge orientation.
3 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 105 mm (4.13 in.) to 216 mm (8.5 in.), and the length
is from 148 mm (5.83 in.) to 356 mm (14 in.).
Paper sizes, types, and weights supported by the output options
Supported paper sizes
Paper size 4‑bin mailbox Output expander
and high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
A6 XX
A5 11,3
JIS B5 2 2
Executive 2 2
Letter
A4
1 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first.
2 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
3 The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
4 The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 217 mm (8.54 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 183
Paper size 4‑bin mailbox Output expander
and high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole punch
finisher
Legal 3
Folio
Oficio
Statement 2 2
Universal 43,4
Envelopes XXX
1 The finisher staples the paper if it is loaded long edge first.
2 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
3 The finisher stacks and staples the paper but does not punch holes in it.
4 The finisher staples the paper if its width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 217 mm (8.54 in.).
Supported paper types and weights
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Output
expander and
high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Plain Paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Card Stock 163 g/m2
(90 Ib index) X 1 1
199 g/m2
(110 Ib index) XXX
Transparency2146 g/m2
(39 Ib bond) X 1 1
Recycled 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Paper labels 180 g/m2
(48 Ib bond) XXX
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 177.
Paper and specialty media guide 184
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Output
expander and
high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Dual web and
Integrated
180 g/m2
(48 Ib bond) XXX
Bond 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Envelope 105 g/m2
(28 Ib bond) XXX
Rough Envelope 105 g/m2
(28 Ib bond) XXX
Letterhead 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Preprinted 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Colored Paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Light paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Heavy paper 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 177.
Paper and specialty media guide 185
Paper type Paper weight 4‑bin mailbox Output
expander and
high‑capacity
output expander
Staple finisher Staple, hole
punch finisher
Rough/cotton 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
Custom type [x] 90–176 g/m2
(24–47 lb bond) XXX
60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond)
1 The finisher stacks the paper but does not staple or punch holes in it.
2 Print on transparencies by batches of only up to 20 to prevent them from sticking together. For more information,
see “Tips on using transparencies” on page 177.
Paper and specialty media guide 186
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names3
Custom Bin Names3
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Stapler Test
Network Setup Page1
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Active NIC
Standard Network2
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
SMTP Setup
Security Settings Help Option Card Menu5
Edit Security Setups4
Miscellaneous Security
Settings3
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
General Settings
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Print Quality
Printing Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
A list of installed DLEs
(Download Emulators)
appears.
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Network Setup Page or Network [x] Setup Page.
2 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
3 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
4 This menu appears only in some touch‑screen printer models.
5 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 187
Paper menu
Vinyl label is supported only in MS710 Series printer models.
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder1
MP Feeder2
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for
Multipurpose Feeder or MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays
have the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. The
multipurpose feeder may also be linked. When one tray is empty,
the print job continues using the linked tray.
•The A6 paper size is supported only in Tray 1 and in the
multipurpose feeder.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 188
Use To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1.
Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom
Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Cassette” for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size.
Make sure to set the paper size value.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 189
Use To
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure to “Cassette” for MP Feeder
Type to appear as a menu.
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the paper size being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international
factory default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to “Manual” for Manual
Paper Type to appear as a menu.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding the printer menus 190
Use To
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
•Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
•First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper
source.
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
O
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not
available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•O indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Understanding the printer menus 191
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•These options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 192
Use To
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the rough or cotton paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 193
Use To
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is light.
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the cotton or rough paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 194
Use To
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Card Stock Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Card
Stock as the paper type.
Recycled Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Recycled as the paper type.
Labels Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Labels
as the paper type.
Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Vinyl
Labels as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Bond
as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Light
as the paper type.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Understanding the printer menus 195
Use To
Heavy Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Heavy
as the paper type.
Rough/Cotton Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with Rough
or Cotton as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
O
Determine and set two-sided printing for all print jobs with
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom
type is supported.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menu selections.
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected
from Print Properties or the print dialog, depending on your operating system.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default custom
type name or a user‑defined custom name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom
Type [x] name in the printer menus.
Note: This menu item appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 196
Custom Bin Names menu
Note: This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Standard Bin Specify a custom name for the standard bin.
Bin [x] Specify a custom name for Bin [x].
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can
increase the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either
direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than
the maximum width supported in the tray.
Understanding the printer menus 197
Bin Setup menu
Use To
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify the default bin.
Notes:
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name appears only once in the menu.
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment
Specify configuration options for bins.
Notes:
•Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting
treats each bin as a separate mailbox.
•Link configures all available bins as one large bin.
•Mail Overflow configures each bin as a separate
mailbox.
•Link Optional links all available bins except the
standard bin and only appears when at least two
optional bins are installed.
•Type Assignment assigns each paper type to a
bin or linked bin set.
•Bins assigned the same name are automatically
linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify an alternative bin when a designated bin is full.
Notes:
•Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name only appears once in the bin list.
•[x] can be any number between 1 and 12 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
Understanding the printer menus 198
Use To
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Labels Bin
Vinyl Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin
Select a bin for each supported paper type.
For each type, select the following options:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•[x] can be any number between 1 and 12 if the
appropriate optional bins are installed.
•If multiple bins are assigned the same name, then
the name only appears once in the bin list.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays,
installed memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel
language, TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network
connection, and other information.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and
details about printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only if an optional staple finisher is installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers
connected to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information.
Notes:
•This menu item is available only when more than one network option
is installed.
•This menu item appears only in network printers or in printers
connected to print servers.
Understanding the printer menus 199
Use To
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only when LDSS is enabled.
Print Fonts
PCL Fonts
PostScript Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set
in the printer.
Note: A separate list is available for PCL and PostScript emulations.
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or
printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Job Buer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working properly.
•This menu item appears only when an optional flash drive or printer
hard disk is installed.
Asset Report Print a report containing printer asset information, such as serial number
and model name.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Ecient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the
Ethernet network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 200
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine
incoming data and it uses the default printer language specified in the
Setup menu.
NPA Mode
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 201
Use To
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a
wireless network.
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP
address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
O
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 202
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto
IP settings to O. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to O on
systems that support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
O
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
O
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
O
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Ye s
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File
Transfer Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Ye s
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the
printer can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Ye s
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Understanding the printer menus 203
Use To
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Ye s
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > IPv6
•Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
O
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
O
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic
IPv6 address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
O
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a
wireless network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Understanding the printer menus 204
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network
when a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point
with WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the
printer and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Ye s
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded
Web Server.
Understanding the printer menus 205
Use To
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the
network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS
SmartSwitch is set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL
SmartSwitch is set to O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 206
Use To
USB Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The USB buer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
printer control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On buers jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 207
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the parallel input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any print jobs already buered on the
printer hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
•The parallel buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the USB, serial, and network buers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 208
Use To
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
O
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•O disables parallel port negotiation.
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
•Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
•Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
O
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time
the computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
On
O
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of
a strobe.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Mac Binary PS
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•O filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Understanding the printer menus 209
Use To
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external
print server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job
received through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer
language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the
default printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is
set to O.
PS SmartSwitch
On
O
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to O, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to
O.
NPA Mode
On
O
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
•When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in
NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.
•When set to O, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Understanding the printer menus 210
Use To
Serial Buer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the serial input buer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns o job buering. Any jobs already buered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
•The serial buer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
printer, the size of the other link buers, and whether Resource Save is
set to On or O.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and network buers.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buering
O
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. The printer does not buer print jobs on
the printer hard disk.
•On buers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
•Auto buers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
•Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
Notes:
•DTR is the factory default setting.
•DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
•XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
On
O
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Understanding the printer menus 211
Use To
Baud
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
Notes:
•9600 is the factory default setting.
•138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in
the Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial
Option 1, Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
Data Bits
7
8
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Parity
Even
Odd
None
Ignore
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Honor DSR
On
O
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port
uses DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by
electrical noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray
characters to print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from
printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying
to send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by
the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 212
Use To
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to
the SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server
determines if SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for printing
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the
SMTP server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-
mail.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail
and User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
•User‑Initiated E‑mail, Kerberos 5 Realm, and NTLM Domain
appear only in touch‑screen printer models.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Note: This menu appears only in select touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Edit Backup Password
Use Backup Password
•O
•On
Password
Create a backup password.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting for “Use Backup Password.”
•This menu appears only if a backup password exists.
Understanding the printer menus 213
Use To
Edit Building Blocks
Internal Accounts
NTLM
Simple Kerberos Setup
Kerberos Setup
Active Directory
LDAP
LDAP+GSSAPI
Password
PIN
Edit settings for Internal Accounts, NTLM, Simple Kerberos Setup, Kerberos
Setup, Active Directory, LDAP, Password, and PIN.
Edit Security Templates
[list of available templates]
Add or edit a security template.
Edit Access Controls
Administrative Menus
Function Access
Management
Solutions
Cancel jobs at the Device
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Note: This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer
control panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users
are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10. 3 attempts is the factory
default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1
to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding
the login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. 5 minutes is
the factory default setting.
•Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the
printer control panel before automatically logging the user o. Settings
range from 1 to 900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains
idle before automatically logging the user o. Settings range from 1 to
120 seconds. 10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 214
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
O
2–10
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
•Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print
jobs reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for
those print jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned o, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
O
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by
the file system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros,
and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 215
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit
the file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files
without having to turn o the printer for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple
pass method.
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the audit log.
Notes:
•To export the audit log from the printer control panel, a flash drive must
be attached to the printer.
•The audit log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and
saved on a computer.
Delete Log
Ye s
No
Specify whether or not audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how and whether or not audit logs are created.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log
and remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No
is the factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the
remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event
is recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date and Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time Show the current date and time settings for the printer.
Understanding the printer menus 216
Use To
Manually Set Date and Time
[input date/time]
Enter the date and time.
Notes:
•Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
•The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM
format.
Time Zone
[list of time zones]
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically observe DST
On
O
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end
times associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTP
On
O
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•The setting is turned o if you manually set the date and time.
Understanding the printer menus 217
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text that appears on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printer models.
You may need to install special hardware for some
languages.
Show Supply Estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View supply estimates on the control panel, Embedded Web
Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
O
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Setting Eco-Mode to Energy or Paper may aect printer
performance, but not print quality.
Quiet Mode
O
On
Reduce printer noise.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Run Initial Setup
Ye s
No
Run the setup wizard.
Understanding the printer menus 218
Use To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkish
Czech
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key 1
Custom Key 2
Specify a language and custom key information for the
keyboard on the display.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•Custom Key 2 appears only in some touch‑screen printer
models.
Paper Sizes
US
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Note: US is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 219
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Specify the display information in the upper corners of the
home screen.
Select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Custom Text [x]
Customize the text to display in the upper corners of the home
screen.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•You can type up to 32 characters.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Specify the display information for Black Toner.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Understanding the printer menus 220
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Specify the display information for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and
Service Errors.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•No is the factory default setting for Display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change language
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Change the icons that appear on the control panel.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Notes:
•Profiles and Apps appears only in touch‑screen printer
models.
•Display is the factory default setting for Search Held
Jobs, Held jobs, and USB Drive.
•Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
Language, Profiles and Apps, Bookmarks, and Jobs by
user.
Home screen customization
Forms and Favorites
Background and Idle Screen
Eco-Settings
Change the icons that appear on the control panel.
Select from the following options:
Display
Do not display
Notes:
•These settings appear only in touch‑screen printer
models.
•Display is the factory default setting.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•MM-DD-YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 221
Use To
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the printer time.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•100 is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
O
Dim
Bright
Set the amount of light from the bin.
Notes:
•If Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then Dim is
the factory default setting.
•If Eco-Mode is set to O or Paper, then Bright is the
factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when an indicator light is
installed in the bin or an optional bin with an indicator
light is added.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
O
Volume
1–10
Set the button volume and feedback.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Ye s
No
Specify whether to display bookmarks from the Held Jobs
area.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•Yes is the factory default setting.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the time between Embedded Web Server refreshes.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•120 seconds is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name for the printer.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Understanding the printer menus 222
Use To
Location Specify the printer location.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm
Hole Punch Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
Select from the following options:
O
Single
Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control.
•O is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm,
Staple Alarm, and Hole Punch Alarm.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Set the idle time before the printer enters a lower power state.
Notes:
•Standby Mode appears only in touch‑screen printer
models.
•15 minutes is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the idle time before the printer begins operating in Sleep
Mode.
Notes:
•20 minutes is the factory default setting.
•Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to
O.
Timeouts
Print with Display O
Allow printing with display o
Display on when printing
Print a job with the display turned o.
Note: Display on when printing is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 223
Use To
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
20 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
6 hours
1 day
2 days
3 days
1 week
2 weeks
1 month
Set the time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active
Ethernet or fax connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the idle time before the display automatically returns to
Ready state.
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
O
On
Remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer instead of returning to the home screen.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•O is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the printer to end a print job after it has been idle for the
specified amount of time.
Notes:
•90 seconds is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in
the printer is printed.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL
emulation.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the time the printer waits to receive for more data before
canceling a print job.
Notes:
•40 seconds is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation.
Understanding the printer menus 224
Use To
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the time the printer waits for user intervention before it
holds jobs that require unavailable resources.
Notes:
•30 seconds is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a hard disk is installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain
oine situations when these are not resolved within the
specified time period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
O
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless other tasks need the memory required
to hold the pages.
Print Recovery
Jam Assist
On
O
Set the printer to check for jammed paper automatically.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
O
On
Set the printer to print the correct output for a page.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
O
Remain in the same location and reset the Screen Timeout
timer instead of returning to the home screen.
Notes:
•This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
•O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 225
Use To
Accessibility Settings
Speech Rate
Very Slow
Slow
Normal
Fast
Faster
Very Fast
Rapid
Very Rapid
Fastest
Adjust the Voice Guidance speaking rate.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Accessibility Settings
Headphone Volume
1–10
Set the headphones volume.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Information Sent to Lexmark
Supplies and Page Usage (Anonymous)
On
O
Send anonymous device usage information to Lexmark.
Note: The default value depends on what you selected
during the initial setup.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button.
Note: Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Restore the printer factory default settings.
Notes:
•Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
•All downloads stored in the RAM are deleted.
Downloads stored in the flash memory or in the printer
hard disk are not aected.
Custom Home Message
O
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text 1
Select a custom home message that appears as an alternating
display of the printer status.
Note: This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer
models.
Export Configuration Package
Export
Export the configuration package to a flash drive.
Understanding the printer menus 226
Use To
Export Compressed Logs File
Export
Export the compressed logs file to a flash drive.
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings menu
Use To
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder1
MP Feeder2
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Staple
O
On
Specify whether prints are stapled.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•On allows the printer to staple print jobs.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
O
On
Specify whether prints have holes for binding.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be made on the prints.
Notes:
•“3 holes” is the U.S. factory default setting. “4 holes” is the international
factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 227
Use To
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge
for portrait and top edge for landscape). This is the factory default setting.
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This setting aects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the
same menu is not set to O.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per
side.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image when using N‑Up (pages per side).
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•This setting aects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the
same menu is not set to O.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using N‑Up (pages per
side).
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or landscape orientation.
•This setting aects jobs if the value of the Paper Saver setting in the
same menu is not set to O.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 228
Use To
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify if blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job.
This setting is useful when printing on transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document for notes.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder1
MP Feeder2
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify if blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PCL Emulation is the factory default setting.
•PostScript emulation uses a PostScript interpreter for
processing print jobs.
•PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing
print jobs.
•Setting a printer language default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use
another printer language.
Understanding the printer menus 229
Use To
Job Waiting
On
O
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue when
they require unavailable printer options or custom settings.
They are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options, or both are
obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures
that stored jobs are not deleted if the printer loses
power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the
Normal setting, the printer clips the image at the
boundary.
•Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper
size.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary.
This setting aects only pages printed using a PCL 5e
interpreter and has no eect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in
the RAM is temporary.
•Storing downloads in a flash memory or in a printer hard
disk places them in permanent storage. Downloads
remain in the flash memory or printer hard disk even
when the printer is turned o.
•This menu item appears only if an optional flash memory
or a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding the printer menus 230
Use To
Resource Save
On
O
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such
as fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer
receives a print job that requires more than the available
memory.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to
retain downloads only until memory is needed.
Downloads are deleted in order to process print jobs.
•On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, then Memory Full [38] appears on the
printer display, but downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are
printed when Print All is selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or
Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and
pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define the way duplexed pages are bound and printed.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding
along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for
landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge
for portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 231
Use To
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,1,1) (2,2,2)” is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
O
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job.
This setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting
blank pages in a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder1
MP Feeder2
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Notes:
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•From the Paper menu, set Configure MP to "Cassette" for Multipurpose
Feeder or MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Saver
O
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple‑page images on one side of a paper.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•The number selected is the number of page images that will print per
side.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they
are in portrait or landscape orientation.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 232
Use To
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between
portrait and landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Staple Job
O
On
Specify whether printed output is stapled.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Run Stapler Test Print a report that confirms that the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
Hole Punch
On
O
Specify whether holes will be created on printed outputs for the purpose of
collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Hole Punch Mode
2 holes
3 holes
4 holes
Specify the number of holes to be created on printed outputs for the purpose
of collecting the sheets in a binder or folder.
Notes:
•“3 holes” is the U.S. factory default setting. “4 holes” is the international
factory default setting.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple, hole punch finisher is
installed.
Oset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Oset pages at certain instances.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after
all page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs sets the same oset position for the entire print job
regardless of the number of copies printed.
•This menu appears only when a supported staple finisher is installed.
1 This menu appears only in touch‑screen printer models.
2 This menu appears only in non‑touch‑screen printer models.
Understanding the printer menus 233
Quality menu
Use To
Print Resolution
300 dpi
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
Specify the printed output resolution in dots per inch.
Note: 600 dpi is the factory default setting.
Pixel Boost
O
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Enable more pixels to print in clusters for clarity, in order to enhance images
horizontally or vertically, or to enhance fonts.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–10
Lighten or darken the printed output.
Notes:
•8 is the factory default setting.
•Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
O
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps,
electrical circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•To set this option using the Embedded Web Server, type the network printer
IP address in the Web browser address field.
Gray Correction
Auto
O
Automatically adjust the contrast enhancement applied to images.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the printed output either by lightening or darkening it. You can conserve
toner by lightening the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of printed objects.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed. Make sure that the hard disk is not
read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use To
Job Accounting Log
O
On
Set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 234
Use To
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
O
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log
Action at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit
(100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the
default log file prefix.
Understanding the printer menus 235
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting aects only print jobs that are stored in the printer
hard disk. Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held
jobs are not aected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from
the printer hard disk or printer memory.
Format Flash
Ye s
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn o the printer while the flash
memory is being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in the flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory
card in the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working flash memory
card is installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buered
jobs, and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the
display to return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn o the printer.
Coverage Estimator
O
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The
estimate is printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
O
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Understanding the printer menus 236
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Ye s
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
O
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
O
Disable the SysStart file.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only when a formatted flash memory
option card or printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buer Size must not be set to 100%.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•“Resident” is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory
default set of fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“Flash” and “Disk” settings show all fonts resident in that option.
•The flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•“Download” shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•“All” shows all fonts available to any option.
Understanding the printer menus 237
Use To
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and the option where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for
Download.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the
international factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters,
punctuation, and special symbols. Symbol sets support the dierent
languages or specific programs such as math symbols for scientific
text. Only the supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 inch.
•Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
•Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display
but it cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on the page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the
page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default
setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
Paper Size and Orientation you want before setting Lines per Page.
Understanding the printer menus 238
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•“198 mm” is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: O is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
O
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
O
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
O
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays and feeders.
Notes:
•“O” is the factory default setting.
•“None” ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This option
appears only when it is selected by the PCL 5 interpreter.
•“0–199” allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T1 Default = 4
T1 Default = 5
T1 Default = 20
T1 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray or feeder.
Understanding the printer menus 239
Use To
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Restore all tray and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
PPDS menu
Menu item Description
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Sets the orientation of the text and graphics on the page
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting.
•Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Lines per Page
1–255
Sets the number of lines that print on each page
Notes:
•64 is the factory default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on
the Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the
desired Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.
Lines per Inch
0.25–30.00
Sets the number of lines that print per inch
Notes:
•6 is the factory default setting.
•Lines per Inch can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑inch
increments
Page Format
Print
Whole
Sets the logical and physical printable area of the page
Notes:
•Print is the factory default setting. Print data maintains its position
with respect to edge of the paper.
•When Whole is selected, document margins are calculated from the
top left corner of the physical edge of the page.
•Printing does not occur outside the printable area.
Character Set
1
2
Specifies a default character set for PPDS print jobs
Notes:
•2 is the factory default setting. Character Set 2 is composed of
printable characters and symbols used in non‑US English languages.
•When Characters Set 1 is selected, values given to the printer are
interpreted as printer commands.
Best Fit
On
O
Replaces a missing font with a similar font
Note: On is the factory default setting. If the requested font is not found,
the printer will use a similar font.
Understanding the printer menus 240
Menu item Description
Tray 1 Renumber
O
Tray 2
Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
dierent source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Tray 2 is displayed only when it is installed.
Auto CR after LF
On
O
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR)
after a line feed (LF) control command
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Auto LF after CR
On
O
Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after
a carriage return (CR) control command
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•Settings are duplicated in the PCL Emulation menu.
Understanding the printer menus 241
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Tay
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTJA
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do
not specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Understanding the printer menus 242
Use To
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
O
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation
settings for some images.
Invert
On
O
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•O is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Print Quality Provides information about solving print quality issues
Printing Guide Provides information about loading paper and other specialty media
Media Guide Provides a list of the paper sizes supported in trays and feeders
Print Defects Guide Provides a template for determining the cause of repeating print quality
defects, and lists settings that can be used to adjust print quality
Menu Map Provides a list of the control panel menus and settings
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Connection Guide Provides information about connecting the printer locally (USB) or to a
network
Understanding the printer menus 243
Menu item Description
Moving Guide Provides instructions for safely moving the printer
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding the printer menus 244
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their
impact on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce
materials, and provide collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This
chapter outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading the display, adjust its brightness settings.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears
as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Click Submit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can
significantly reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such
as printing on both sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see the following:
•“Using Eco‑Mode” on page 74 for non‑touch‑screen printer models
•“Using Eco‑Mode” on page 121 and “Using Eco‑Mode” on page 169 for touch‑screen printer models
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled oce paper produced
specifically for use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer,
see “Using recycled paper and other oce papers” on page 179.
Saving money and the environment 245
Conserving supplies
•Print on both sides of the paper.
Note: Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
•Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before printing it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more
information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Select the product you want to recycle.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark Collection and Recycling Program may be
recycled through your local recycling center.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are
transported in the most ecient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to
dispose of. These eciencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource
savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist
in your area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle
the box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program allows you to return used cartridges for free to Lexmark for reuse
or recycling. One hundred percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or
demanufactured for recycling. The boxes used to return the cartridges are also recycled.
Saving money and the environment 246
Maintaining the printer
Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark
authorized supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use
of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies
or parts is not covered by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and
parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage
beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy
may vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings,
and other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption
is dierent from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing
or replacing supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, the
estimated cartridge yield is based on approximately 5% coverage per page.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
•Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19752 standard.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively aect actual yield.
Item Return Program cartridge
For the United States and Canada
Toner Cartridge 521
High Yield Toner Cartridge 521H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 521X*
For the European Union, European Economic Area , and Switzerland
Toner Cartridge 522
High Yield Toner Cartridge 522H
* This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn, and MS812de printer models.
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 248
Item Return Program cartridge
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 522X*
For the Asia Pacific Region (includes Australia and New Zealand)
Toner Cartridge 523
High Yield Toner Cartridge 523H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 523X*
For Latin America (includes Puerto Rico and Mexico)
Toner Cartridge 524
High Yield Toner Cartridge 524H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 524X*
For Africa, Middle East, Central Eastern Europe, and Commonwealth of Independent States
Toner Cartridge 525
High Yield Toner Cartridge 525H
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 525X*
* This toner cartridge is supported only in MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn, and MS812de printer models.
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.
Item Regular cartridge
Worldwide
High Yield Toner Cartridge 520HA1
Extra High Yield Toner Cartridge 520XA2
1 This cartridge is supported only in MS810n and MS810dn printer models.
2 This cartridge is supported only in MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn, and MS812de printer models.
Ordering an imaging unit
Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may cause imaging unit parts to fail prior to
exhaustion of toner.
For more information on replacing the imaging unit, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Part name Lexmark Return Program Regular
Imaging unit 520Z 520ZA
Ordering staple cartridges
Item Part number
Staple cartridges 25A0013
Maintaining the printer 249
Ordering a roller kit
For more information on replacing the roller kit, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
Lexmark roller kit and part number
Type Part number
Printer engine roller maintenance kit 40X7706
Ordering a maintenance kit
To identify the supported fuser type, view the label on the fuser. Do either of the following:
•Remove the toner cartridge and the imaging unit. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be
seen on the front of the fuser.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
•Pull down the printer rear door. The two-digit fuser type code (such as 00 or 01) can be seen on the rear of
the fuser.
Notes:
•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
•The separator roller, fuser, pick roller assembly, and transfer roller are all included in the maintenance kit
and can be individually ordered and replaced if necessary.
•For more information on replacing the maintenance kit, see the instruction sheet that came with the
supply.
Lexmark Return Program fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810, MS811, and
MS812
Fuser maintenance kit type Part number
Type 00 40X8420
Type 01 40X8421
Type 02 40X8422
Type 03 40X8423
Type 04 40X8424
Lexmark regular fuser maintenance kits and part numbers for MS810, MS811, and MS812
Fuser maintenance kit type Part number
Type 05 40X8425
Type 06 40X8426
Type 07 40X8427
Type 08 40X8428
Type 09 40X8429
Maintaining the printer 250
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing
until you are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Replacing supplies
Replacing the toner cartridge
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 251
2Pull the cartridge out of the printer using the handle.
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, then remove the packing material, and then shake the cartridge to
redistribute the toner.
4Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
Note: Make sure the cartridge is fully pushed in.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing a toner cartridge, do not leave the imaging unit exposed to
direct light for an extended period of time. Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Maintaining the printer 252
5Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Replacing the imaging unit
1Lift the front cover, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.
2
1
Maintaining the printer 253
2Pull out the toner cartridge from the printer using the handle.
3Lift the green handle, and then pull out the imaging unit from the printer.
1
2
4Unpack the new imaging unit, and then shake it.
5Remove all packing material from the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may aect the print
quality of future print jobs.
Maintaining the printer 254
6Insert the imaging unit into the printer by aligning the arrows on the side rails of the imaging unit with the
arrows on the side rails inside the printer.
7Insert the toner cartridge into the printer by aligning the side rails of the cartridge with the arrows on the
side rails inside the printer.
Maintaining the printer 255
8Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
2
1
Replacing a staple cartridge
1Open the stapler door.
2Pull down the latch of the staple cartridge holder, and then pull the holder out of the finisher.
Maintaining the printer 256
3Squeeze both sides of the empty staple case with your fingers, and then remove the staple case from the
cartridge.
1
1
2
4Insert the front side of the new staple case into the staple cartridge, and then push the rear side into the
cartridge.
1
2
5Push the staple cartridge into the finisher until it clicks into place.
6Close the stapler door.
Cleaning printer parts
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the
printer warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned o and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer
before proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
Maintaining the printer 257
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents to prevent damage to the
exterior of the printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Emptying the hole punch box
1Pull out the hole punch box.
2Empty the container.
Maintaining the printer 258
3Insert the emptied hole punch box back into the finisher until it clicks into place.
Moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or
more trained personnel to lift it safely.
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal
injury or printer damage:
•Turn o the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer.
•If two or more optional finishers are installed, then remove the finishers individually from the printer.
Notes:
–Make sure to remove the topmost finisher first.
–To remove the finisher, hold the finisher on both sides, and then lift the latches to unlock the finisher.
Maintaining the printer 259
•If the printer does not have a caster base but is configured with optional trays, then remove the trays.
Note: Slide the latch on the right side of the optional tray toward the front of the tray until it clicks into
place.
•Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
•Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
•Make sure there is adequate clearance around the printer.
•Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Maintaining the printer 260
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the
printer warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the
hardware options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Maintaining the printer 261
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load them properly to avoid paper jams. For more information,
see “Avoiding jams” on page 262. If jams occur, then follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam Recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory
required to hold the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Clearing jams 262
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing
tightly against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
•If you are loading prepunched paper for use with the staple finisher, then make sure the holes on the long
edge of the paper are on the right side of the tray. For more information, see the “Loading paper and specialty
media” section of the User’s Guide.
Allow the paper to enter the optional mailbox bins properly
•Make sure to adjust the bin extender so that the paper size indicators match the size of the paper used.
Notes:
–If the bin extender is shorter than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the paper causes a
jam in the mailbox bin. For example, if you are printing on a legal-size paper and the bin extender is
set to letter-size, then a jam occurs.
–If the bin extender is longer than the size of the paper you are printing on, then the edges become
uneven and the paper is not stacked properly. For example, if you are printing on a letter-size paper
and the bin extender is set to legal-size, then the paper does not stack properly.
Clearing jams 263
•If paper needs to be returned to the mailbox bin, then insert the paper under the bin arm, and then push
the paper all the way back.
1
2
Note: If the paper is not under the bin arm, then a jam occurs due to an overfilled bin.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper or specialty media before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Identifying jam locations
Notes:
•When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank or pages with partial prints after a jammed page
has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
•When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.
Clearing jams 264
Jam locations
1Staple finisher
2Standard bin
3Front door
4Multipurpose feeder
5Duplex unit
6Trays
7Output expander
8Rear door
9Mailbox
10 Staple finisher rear door
Clearing jams 265
Paper jam in the front door
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
1Open the front cover and the multipurpose feeder.
2
1
2Remove the toner cartridge.
3Remove the imaging unit.
1
2
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes.
Extended exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
Clearing jams 266
4Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
12
5Insert the imaging unit.
Note: Use the arrows on the side of the printer as a guide.
6Insert the toner cartridge.
7Close the multipurpose feeder door and the front cover.
8If necessary, press on the control panel.
Paper jam in the rear door
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
Clearing jams 267
1Open the rear door.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the rear door.
Clearing jams 268
4Push the back of the standard tray.
5Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
6Insert the standard tray.
7If necessary, press on the control panel.
Clearing jams 269
Paper jam in the standard bin
1Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
2If necessary, press on the control panel.
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1Remove the tray.
1
2
3
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
2
1
Clearing jams 270
3Insert the tray.
4If necessary, press on the control panel.
Paper jam in trays
1Remove the tray.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 271
3Insert the tray.
4If necessary, press on the control panel.
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder
1Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.
Clearing jams 272
4Reload paper, and then adjust the paper guide.
5If necessary, press on the control panel.
Paper jam in the staple finisher
1Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 273
2Open the rear staple finisher door.
3Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the door.
5If necessary, press on the control panel.
Clearing jams 274
Staple jam in the finisher
1Open the staple access door.
2Remove the staple cartridge holder.
3Open the staple guard, and then remove the loose staples.
Clearing jams 275
4Close the staple guard.
5Press the staples against the metal bracket.
Note: If the staples are at the rear of the cartridge, then shake the cartridge downward to bring the
staples near the metal bracket.
Clearing jams 276
6Insert the staple cartridge holder.
7Close the staple access door.
8If necessary, press on the control panel.
Clearing jams 277
Paper jam in the output expander
1Open the rear output expander door.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the door.
4If necessary, press on the control panel.
Clearing jams 278
Paper jam in the mailbox
1Open the rear mailbox door.
2Remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the door.
4 If the jam is in the mailbox bin, then remove the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 279
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
5If necessary, press on the control panel.
Clearing jams 280
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch [41.xy]
Use only a supported toner cartridge and imaging unit.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, go to www.lexmark.com.
Change [paper source] to [custom string] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Tou ch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size] load [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified
in the Paper menu on the printer control panel, and then select Finished changing paper. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the print job.
Troubleshooting 281
Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the specified tray.
4Reattach the tray.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
If the error occurs again, then:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the tray.
4Contact customer support.
•To clear the message and resume the job, select Continue on the printer control panel. For non-touch-
screen printer models, press to confirm.
Close door or insert cartridge
The toner cartridge is missing or not installed properly. Insert the cartridge, and then close all doors and
covers.
Close finisher rear door
Close the finisher rear door of the printer.
Close rear door
Close the rear door of the printer.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 282
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job is removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a dierent
printer model.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non-touch-screen printer models,
press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, select Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Troubleshooting 283
Empty the hole punch box
Try one or more of the following:
•Empty the hole punch box.
•Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the print job.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Imaging unit low [84.xy]
You may need to order an imaging unit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Imaging unit nearly low [84.xy]
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Imaging unit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
You may need to replace the imaging unit very soon. For more information, see the "Replacing supplies"
section of the User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Incompatible output bin [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the indicated bin.
•Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing without using
the specified bin. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 284
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Try one or more of the following:
•Remove the specified tray.
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing without
using the specified tray. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Note: The paper source can be a tray or a feeder.
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size of paper in the paper source.
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a dierent paper
source. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Check the length and width guides of the paper source and make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
•Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if Multipurpose Feeder Size or MP Feeder
Size is set to Universal, then make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•Cancel the print job.
Insert hole punch box
Insert the hole punch box into the finisher, and then select Continue on the printer control panel to clear
the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert a staple cartridge. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•Select Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher. For non-touch-screen
printer models, press to confirm.
Insert Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Insert the specified tray into the printer.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin for a linked set of bins by selecting Reset active bin on the printer control panel.
Troubleshooting 285
Install bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified bin:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the specified bin.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset active bin
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the specified tray:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Install the specified tray.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
•Cancel the print job.
•Reset the active bin.
Insucient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data from the printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Insucient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 286
Insucient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer
models, press to confirm.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Insucient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin
collating the rest of the print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job.
Insucient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save,
clear the message, and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Load [paper source] with [custom string] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray that has the correct size or type of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 287
Load [paper source] with [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size of paper, select Finished loading paper on the printer
control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size] [paper orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder that has the correct size and type of paper, select Finished loading paper on
the printer control panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it feeds from that
tray. If the printer cannot find a tray that has the correct size and type of paper, then it prints from the
default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom string] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
•Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [custom type name] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 288
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper size] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
•Cancel the current job.
Load multipurpose feeder with [paper type] [paper size] [orientation]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the multipurpose feeder with the correct paper size and type.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue
printing.
Note: If no paper is loaded in the feeder, the printer manually overrides the request, and then prints
from an automatically selected tray.
•Cancel the current job.
Load staples
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace or insert the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
•Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the print job.
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer
support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 289
Maintenance kit very low [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, contact customer support
at http://support.lexmark.com or your service representative.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
•Install additional printer memory.
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in output bin [24y.xx]
Select Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
•Turn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see User’s Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be toner cartridge or imaging unit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-
party supplies or parts may aect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging
components. For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 248.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable
results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can aect warranty coverage.
Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your
printer, press and hold and the # button on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
Troubleshooting 290
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press and on the control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds
to clear the message and continue printing.
If you do not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer and
install a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For a list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to www.lexmark.com.
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
•Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Use current supplies on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing.
For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job.
Parallel port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
•Select Reset active bin to reset the bin for a linked set of bins.
Printer had to restart. Last job may be incomplete.
Select Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Troubleshooting 291
Reattach bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Reattach the specified bin.
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the specified bin.
4Reattach the bin.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
•Remove the specified bin:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the specified bin.
4Contact customer support.
•Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified
bin. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Reattach bins [x] – [y]
Try one or more of the following:
•Turn o the printer, and then turn it back on.
•Reattach the specified bins:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the specified bins.
4Reattach the bins.
5Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6Turn the printer back on.
•Remove the specified bins:
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the specified bins.
4Contact customer support.
Select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and print without using the specified
bins. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 292
Reinstall missing or unresponsive cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the toner cartridge is missing. If missing, then install the toner cartridge.
For information on installing the toner cartridge, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
•If the toner cartridge is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive toner cartridge.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the toner cartridge. The
cartridge may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see “Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 248.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive imaging unit [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Check if the imaging unit is missing. If missing, then install the imaging unit.
For information on installing the imaging unit, see the “Replacing supplies” section.
•If the imaging unit is installed, then remove and reinstall the unresponsive imaging unit.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then replace the imaging unit. The
imaging unit may be defective or a non‑genuine Lexmark supply. For more information, see “Using
genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 248.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
1Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
2Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Remove paper from all bins
Bins have reached their capacity. Remove paper from all bins to clear the message and continue printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For
non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For
non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 293
Remove paper from [linked set bin name]
Remove paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For
non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin. The printer automatically detects paper removal and
resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then select Continue on the printer control panel. For
non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Replace cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer
region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
List of printer and toner cartridge regions
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
3 Asia Pacific, Australia, New Zealand
4Latin America
5 Africa, Middle East, rest of Europe
9 Invalid
Notes:
•The x and y values are the .xy of the error code shown on the printer control panel.
•The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace defective imaging unit [31.xy]
Replace the defective imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 294
Replace imaging unit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Replace the imaging unit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply or see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the
User’s Guide or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace maintenance kit, recommended life exceeded [80.xyz]
For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support.
Depending on your printer model, touch Continue or press to clear the message and continue printing.
Replace maintenance kit to resume printing [80.xy]
For more information, go to http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the
message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
Replace missing cartridge [31.xy]
Install the missing toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Replace missing fuser [31.xyz]
Install the missing fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Replace missing imaging unit [31.xy]
Install the missing imaging unit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies”
section of the User’s Guide.
Replace roller kit [81.xx]
1Replace the roller kit. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
2Press to clear the message and continue printing.
Replace unsupported cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing.
For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Troubleshooting 295
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark cartridge, such as a high yield cartridge, that
is not intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark toner cartridge is installed:
32.13
32.16
32.19
32.22
32.25
32.28
32.31
32.34
32.37
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 248.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or go to
www.lexmark.com.
Replace unsupported imaging unit [32.xy]
Remove the imaging unit, and then install a supported one to clear the message and continue printing. For
more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
This error can also be caused by installing a genuine Lexmark imaging unit, such as a MICR unit, that is not
intended to be used in this product.
The following error codes indicate that a non‑genuine Lexmark imaging unit is installed:
32.38
For more information, see “Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies” on page 248.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging unit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Replace wiper
1Replace the fuser wiper. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
2Select Continue on the control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 296
32.14
32.17
32.20
32.23
32.26
32.29
32.32
32.35
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
Serial port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Make sure the Serial Buer menu is set to Enabled.
Some held jobs were not restored
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, press to confirm.
•Turn o the printer and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark
support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Notes:
•The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buer menu is not set to Disabled.
Troubleshooting 297
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Cancel the current job.
The device is operating in Safe Mode. Some print options may be disabled
or provide unexpected results.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Too many bins attached [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra bins.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many disks installed [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra printer hard disks.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many flash options installed [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra trays.
Troubleshooting 298
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.
Unsupported disk
1Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
2Select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Unsupported option in slot [x] [55]
1Turn o the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3Remove the unsupported option card from the printer controller board, and then replace it with a
supported card.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
USB port [x] disabled [56]
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
The printer discards any data received through the specified serial port.
•Select Reset active bin to reset the active bin for a linked set of bins.
•Make sure the USB Buer menu is enabled.
Troubleshooting 299
Solving printer problems
•“Printer does not respond” on page 300
•“Printing problems” on page 302
•“Hardware and internal option problems” on page 311
•“Paper feed problems” on page 315
•“Print quality problems” on page 317
Printer does not respond
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep
button to wake the
printer from Sleep
mode or Hibernate
mode.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and
the other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are
inserted in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match
the following:
•The USB symbol
on the cable with
the USB symbol
on the printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable
with the Ethernet
port
Troubleshooting 300
Action Yes No
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned o by a switch or
breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned o by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors,
uninterruptible power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly
to a properly
grounded electrical
outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the
printer and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other
network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print
server, option, or
other network
device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any
packing material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn o the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the
hardware options,
and then turn on the
printer.
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer
driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 301
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is
solved.
Turn o the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Printing problems
Confidential and other held documents do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the control panel, check if the documents appear in the
Held Jobs list.
Note: If the documents are not listed, then print the
documents using the Print and Hold options.
bPrint the documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•For PDF files, generate a new file, and then print the
documents.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 302
Action Yes No
Step 3
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
the multiple job titles as duplicates.
For Windows users
aOpen the Printing Preferences dialog.
bFrom the Print and Hold section, select Keep duplicate
documents.
cEnter a PIN.
dResend the print job.
For Macintosh users
aSave and name each job dierently.
bSend the job individually.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDelete some held jobs to free up printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aAdd printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Are the documents printed?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Envelope seals when printing
Action Yes No
aUse envelopes that have been stored in a dry environment.
Note: Printing on envelopes with high moisture content can
seal the flaps.
bResend the print job.
Does the envelope seal when printing?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 303
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB slot.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear
USB slot.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB slot?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB
slot.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking
green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer
is ready, then view
the held jobs list, and
then print the
documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives,
see “Supported flash drives and file types” on page 67 for
non‑touch‑screen printer models.
For touch‑screen printer models, see “Supported flash drives
and file types” on page 114 and “Supported flash drives and file
types” on page 162.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB slot is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 304
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn o
the printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex
Trace mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper
size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing
Preferences or the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 305
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set
Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides
the setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number
and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the
number of pages in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed
all fonts.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK .
Do the files print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 306
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
bSelect Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select O.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity
of images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then
resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect
> O
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 307
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog
and check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must
select the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready
appears on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the
message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if
the cables are securely connected to the computer and the
printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation
that came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aTurn o the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer software” on page 34.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 308
Printing slows down
Notes:
•When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the
fuser.
•The printer speed may be reduced when printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated
temperatures.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser,
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the
Paper Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the
same size and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 309
Action Yes No
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be
linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be
linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Step 1
Adjust the print timeout settings.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout
bSelect a higher setting and then, depending on your printer
model, select or Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck the original file for manual page breaks.
bResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 310
Hardware and internal option problems
2100-sheet tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
•Check if the paper or specialty media meets specifications
and is not damaged.
bInsert the tray properly.
Note: Press the paper stack down while inserting the tray.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn it
back on.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in
the Installed Features list.
Note: If the tray is listed in the menu settings page, but paper
jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not be properly
installed.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. For more
information, see the
setup sheet that
came with the 2100-
sheet tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: You may need to manually add the tray in the printer driver
to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 34.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
Go to step 5. Manually add the
tray in the printer
driver.
Troubleshooting 311
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check if the tray is selected.
From the application you are using, select the tray. If you are
using Mac OS X version 9, then make sure the printer is set up
in Chooser.
Does the tray operate properly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn o the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn
on the printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller
board.
aTurn o the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the
power cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate
connector in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly
grounded electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the
controller board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal
option is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the
printer driver to make it available for print jobs. For more
information, see “Adding available options in the print driver”
on page 34.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 312
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reinstall the internal print server.
aRemove, and then install the internal print server. For more
information, see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on
page 16.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the internal print
server is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal print server listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if the internal
print server is
supported by the
printer.
Note: An internal
print server from
another printer may
not work with this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the internal print server connection.
Use the correct cable, and then check if it is securely connected
to the internal print server.
Does the internal print server operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed.
aInstall the ISP. For more information, see “Installing an Internal
Solutions Port” on page 16.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the ISP is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the ISP listed in the Installed Features list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported ISP.
Note: An ISP from
another printer may
not work on this
printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the ISP connection.
aUse the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the ISP.
bCheck if the ISP solution interface cable is securely connected
into the receptacle of the controller board.
Note: The ISP solution interface cable and the receptacle on
the controller board are color‑coded.
Does the Internal Solutions Port operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 313
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure
that the paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aTurn o the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn
the printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed
in the Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information,
see the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to
make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 34.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 314
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the USB or parallel interface card is installed.
aInstall the USB or parallel interface card. For more information,
see “Installing an Internal Solutions Port” on page 16.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the USB or parallel
interface card is listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the USB or parallel interface card listed in the Installed Features
list?
Go to step 2. Check if you have a
supported USB or
parallel interface
card.
Note: A USB or
parallel interface
card from another
printer may not work
on this printer.
Step 2
Check the cable and the USB or parallel interface card connection.
Use the correct cable, and then make sure it is securely
connected to the USB or parallel interface card.
Does the USB or parallel interface card operate correctly?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
aTurn on jam recovery.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Jam
Recovery
2Select On or Auto.
3Depending on your printer model, press or touch
Submit.
bResend the pages that did not print.
Were the jammed pages reprinted?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 315
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are
aligned with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of
the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill
indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and
type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see
“Avoiding jams” on page 262.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
aDo either of the following:
•For touch‑screen printer models, touch or Done.
•For non‑touch‑screen printer models, select Next > >
Clear the jam, press OK > .
bFollow the instructions on the printer display.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 316
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are
supported by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bResend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
Go to step 2. Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
Step 2
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the
printer.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 317
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper size and type match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge.
2Remove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Compressed images appear on prints
Note: Printing on letter-size paper using a 220-volt fuser compresses images.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure the size of the paper loaded in the tray matches the
fuser type.
Note: Use a 110-volt fuser for printing on letter-size paper and
a 220-volt fuser for printing on A4‑size paper.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 318
Action Yes No
Step 2
aReplace the fuser. For more information on installing the fuser,
see the instruction sheet that came with the part.
bResend the print job.
Do compressed images still appear?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality Menu on the printer control panel, decrease
the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reinstall the imaging unit and the toner cartridge.
aRemove the toner cartridge.
bRemove the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging unit
to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure
to light can cause print quality problems.
cInstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
dResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear from the prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 319
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 320
Incorrect margins on prints
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded
in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper size
specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size
from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 321
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
type and weight from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 322
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the
Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper
loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper
size and type from
the tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 323
Print is too dark
ABC
DEF
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the
toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper type,
texture and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Troubleshooting 324
Action Yes No
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Print is too light
ABC
DEF
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase
the toner darkness.
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type, texture, and
weight to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 325
Action Yes No
Step 4
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel,
change the texture
settings in the Paper
Texture menu to
match the paper you
are printing on.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 6. The problem is
solved.
Step 6
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is
solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 326
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is packing material left on the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the
imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Troubleshooting 327
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Repeating defects appear on prints
))
)
))
)
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReplace the imaging unit if the distance between the defects is
equal to any of the following:
•47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
•96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
•28.5 mm (1.12 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aReplace the fuser if the distance between the defects is equal
to either of the following:
•94.25 mm (3.71 in.)
•95.2 mm (3.75 in.)
bResend the print job.
Do repeating defects still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 328
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Load paper with the correct paper type and weight in the tray.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type
and weight in the
tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type
and weight specified
in the tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 329
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct
positions for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the
tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder
from Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the
paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Change the paper
type and weight to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 330
Action Yes No
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type,
texture, and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print
dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 331
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and
weight in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of
the following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the
paper loaded in
the tray to match
the paper
texture, type, and
weight specified
in the tray
settings.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store
paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support at
http://support.lexm
ark.com or your
service
representative.
The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 332
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aReinstall the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
2Install the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Did the toner fog or background shading disappear from the
prints?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Toner rubs o
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Troubleshooting 333
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type, texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in
the tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper
type, texture, and
weight from the tray
settings to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub o?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Uneven print density
Troubleshooting 334
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is
solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of
paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is
solved.
Step 4
aRedistribute the toner in the imaging unit.
1Remove the toner cartridge, and then the imaging unit.
2Firmly shake the imaging unit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging
unit to direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended
exposure to light may cause print quality problems.
3Reinstall the imaging unit, and then the cartridge.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is
solved.
Troubleshooting 335
Action Yes No
Step 5
Replace the imaging unit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is
solved.
Solving home screen application problems
This troubleshooting section applies only to touch-screen printer models.
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in
the address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and
then locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab >
Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then
click Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 336
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
View the printer IP address:
•From the printer home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page,
and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Is the printer IP address correct?
Go to step 2. Type the correct
printer IP address in
the address field of
your Web browser.
Note: Depending on
the network
settings, you may
need to type
“https://” instead
of “http://” before
the printer IP
address to access
the Embedded Web
Server.
Step 2
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 3. Turn on the printer.
Step 3
Check if the network connection is working.
Is the network connection working?
Go to step 4. Contact your system
support person.
Step 4
Make sure the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
Are the cable connections to the printer and print server secure?
Go to step 5. Tighten the cable
connection.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Note: Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing
certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Are the Web proxy servers disabled?
Go to step 6. Contact your system
support person.
Step 6
Access the Embedded Web Server again by typing the correct IP
address in the address field.
Did the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is
solved.
Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 337
Contacting customer support
Before contacting customer support, make sure to have the following information:
•Printer problem
•Error message
•Printer model type and serial number
Go to http://support.lexmark.com to receive e‑mail or chat support, or browse through the library of manuals,
support documentation, drivers, and other downloads.
Technical support via telephone is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries
or regions, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 338
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, MS812dn, MS810de, MS812de
Machine type:
4063
Model(s):
210, 230, 23E, 410, 430, 630, 63E
Edition notice
August 2016
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law: LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of
express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made
to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the
products or the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to
make these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is
not intended to state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally
equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be
used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services,
except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2016 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are
used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software
Documentation are licensed to the U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only
those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 339
Trademarks
Lexmark, the Lexmark logo, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lexmark
International, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies
in the United States and other countries.
Mopria®, the Mopria® logo, and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s
designation of a set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer
is intended to be compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used
in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a
product of Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Notices 340
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Tay Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation
software CD.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 57 (MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n,
MS811dn, and MS812dn); 58
(MS810de and MS812de)
Ready 32 (all models)
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the
European Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your
local sales oce phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in
Notices 341
concentrations exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in
Schedule II of the Rules.
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local
authorities for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch the areas near these symbols without first touching
a metal surface in an area away from the symbol.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to
comply with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped
by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 1 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser
that is nominally a 10 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 787-800 nanometers. The
laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I
level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Notices 342
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be axed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner ernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und oener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην
ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from
electronic inputs.
670 (MS810n and MS810dn); 700 (MS810de); 770
(MS811n and MS811dn); 830 (MS812dn and
MS812de)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from
hard‑copy original documents.
N/A
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. N/A
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. Ready 1: 55 (MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n,
MS811dn, and MS812dn); 60 (MS810de and
MS812de); Ready 2: 30 (All printer models)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 2.9 (MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn, and
MS812dn); 3.3 (MS810de); 3.7 (MS812de)
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5 (MS810n, MS810dn, MS811n, MS811dn,
MS812dn, and MS810de); 0.6 (MS812de)
O The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but
the power switch is turned o.
0.1
Notices 343
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response
time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified
between one hour and one month.
O mode
If this product has an o mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher
Suites for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with
SHA-256/382 and AES Galois Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
Notices 344
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to
Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in
the Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites
for TLS implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic
Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual
Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version
1 (IKEv1) implemented in the product or service.
Multiple model information
The following information applies to all MS810, MS811, and MS812 printer models except for the MS812de printer
model.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER
PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the
country-specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale,
from Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for
repair or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the
product for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or
option with the product.
Notices 345
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to
that user for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this
statement to that user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12
months later provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with
the printer shall end earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser
Units, Transfer/Transport Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is
available are substantially consumed when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance”
message for such item.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to
deliver your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark
designated location. You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the
Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of
the Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a
repair not included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal
obligations, restrictions, liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the
latest version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized
products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized
use of genuine Lexmark products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable
storage media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area
contact Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer
covered by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of
prints produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
Notices 346
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS
OR REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND
SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW
ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL
APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES, AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT
TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance
or nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover
actual damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the
product that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or
damage to real property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL
LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER
ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the
possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's
and its Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers
are intended beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or
limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not
apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment o and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Notices 347
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dierent from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。
この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage
limits, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment.
Notices 348
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Model‑specific information
The following information applies only to the MS812de printer model.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information
statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than
recommended cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes
or modifications could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing
device, use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach
or 1021294 for USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a
violation of FCC regulations.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux
équipements pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Notices 349
Japanese VCCI notice
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU,
and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and
on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY,
40550 USA. The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön
fasor, Millennium Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the
Directives is available upon request from the Authorized Representative or may be obtained at
www.lexmark.com/en_us/about/regulatory-compliance/european-union-declaration-of-conformity.html.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and EN55032 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 and EN55032 Class A limits and
immunity requirements of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic
environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case
the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Notices 350
Index
Numerics
2100‑sheet tray
loading 51, 98, 147
550‑sheet tray
installing 29
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 87, 135
accessing the remote control
panel
Embedded Web Server 71
Active NIC menu 200
adding hardware options
print driver 34
adding internal options
print driver 34
adjusting printer display
brightness 245
adjusting Sleep
mode 75, 122, 171
adjusting toner
darkness 65, 112, 161
administrator settings
Embedded Web
Server 71, 118, 166
AirPrint
using 68, 115, 163
AppleTalk menu 205
applications
home screen 88, 136
attaching cables 32
available internal options 11
avoiding jams 180
avoiding paper jams 262
B
Background and Idle Screen
using 88, 136
Bin Setup menu 198
buttons, printer control
panel 42, 83
buttons, touch screen
using 86, 132
C
cables
Ethernet 32
USB 32
canceling a print job
from a computer 70, 117, 166
from the printer control
panel 70, 117, 166
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 337
card stock
loading 58, 105, 154
tips 176
Cartridge, imaging unit mismatch
[41.xy] 281
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to [paper
size] load [orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 281
Check tray [x] connection 282
checking an unresponsive
printer 300
checking status of parts and
supplies 73, 120, 169
checking the status of parts and
supplies 74, 120, 169
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 118, 166
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 166
cleaning
exterior of the printer 257
cleaning the printer 257
clearing jams
duplex unit 270
Close door or insert
cartridge 282
Close finisher rear door 282
Close rear door 282
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 282
compressed images appear on
prints 318
confidential data
information on
securing 80, 127, 175
confidential jobs
modifying print
settings 72, 119, 167
confidential print
jobs 69, 116, 164
Confidential Print menu 215
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 283
configuration information
wireless network 35
configurations
printer 40, 81, 128
Configure MP menu 191
configuring
multiple printers 72, 119, 168
supply notifications, imaging
unit 71, 118, 166
supply notifications,
maintenance kit 71, 118, 166
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 71, 118, 166
configuring supply
notifications 118, 166
configuring supply notifications
from the Embedded Web
Server 71
connecting to a wireless network
using PBC, Push Button
Configuration method 37
using PIN, Personal
Identification Number
method 37
using the Embedded Web
Server 38
using wireless setup wizard 36
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 245
Eco‑Mode 74, 121, 169
Hibernate mode 76, 122, 171
Quiet mode 75, 121, 170
Sleep Mode 122
Index 351
Sleep mode 75, 171
conserving supplies 246
contacting customer
support 338
control panel, printer
indicator light 43, 84, 131
Sleep button light 43, 84, 131
controller board
accessing 11
creating custom name
paper type 110
Custom Bin Names menu 197
Custom Names menu 196
custom paper type
assigning 64, 160
custom paper type name
assigning 111
creating 63, 159
Custom Type [x]
assigning a paper type 64
changing name 159
creating custom name 110
Custom Type [x] name
creating 63
Custom Types menu 196
customer support
contacting 338
D
Default Source menu 188
Defective flash detected [51] 283
device and network settings
erasing 78
device and network settings
information
erasing 125, 173
directory list
printing 70, 117, 165
Disk full [62] 283
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 283
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 283
disk wiping 79, 125, 174
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 302
display, printer control
panel 42, 83
adjusting brightness 245
disposing of printer hard
disk 77, 123, 172
documents, printing
from a computer 65, 111, 160
E
Eco‑Mode setting 74, 121, 169
Eco‑Settings
about 89
understanding 137
Edit Security Setups menu 213
embedded solutions
erasing 78
embedded solutions information
erasing 125, 173
Embedded Web Server
accessing 87, 135
accessing the remote control
panel 71
adjusting brightness 245
administrator
settings 71, 118, 166
checking the status of
parts 74, 120, 169
checking the status of
supplies 74, 120, 169
copying settings to other
printers 72, 119, 168
modifying confidential print
settings 72, 119, 167
networking settings 71, 118, 166
problem accessing 337
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 127, 175
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide
where to find 71, 118, 166
Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator’s Guide
where to find 80
emission
notices 341, 347, 348, 349, 350
Empty the hole punch box 284
emptying the hole punch
box 258
encrypting the printer hard
disk 79, 126, 174
envelopes
loading 58, 105, 154
tips on using 176
environmental settings
Eco‑Mode 74, 121, 169
Hibernate mode 76, 122, 171
printer display brightness,
adjusting 245
Quiet mode 75, 121, 170
Sleep Mode 122
Sleep mode 75, 171
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 215
erasing hard disk
memory 79, 125, 174
erasing non‑volatile
memory 78, 125, 173
erasing volatile
memory 78, 124, 173
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 284
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 284
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 35
Ethernet port 32
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 35
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 90, 138
exterior of the printer
cleaning 257
F
factory defaults
restoring 122, 171
factory defaults, restoring 76
FCC notices 347, 349
finding more information about
the printer 7
finding printer IP address 87, 135
finisher
finishing features 183
supported paper sizes 183
finisher features 183
Finishing menu 231
firmware card 11
flash drive
printing from 66, 113, 161
flash drives
supported file types 67, 114, 162
font sample list
printing 70, 117, 165
forms
printing 112, 160
Index 352
Forms and Favorites
setting up 89, 137
G
General Settings menu 218
Google Cloud Print
using 68, 115, 163
green settings
Eco‑Mode 74, 121, 169
Hibernate mode 76, 122, 171
Quiet mode 75, 121, 170
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 34
held jobs 69, 116, 164
printing from a Macintosh
computer 69, 116, 165
printing from
Windows 69, 116, 165
held print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 69, 116, 165
printing from
Windows 69, 116, 165
Help menu 243
Hibernate mode
using 76, 122, 171
hiding icons on the home
screen 88, 136
hole punch box
emptying 258
Home button
printer control panel 42, 83, 130
home screen
buttons, understanding 84, 131
customizing 88, 136
hiding icons 88, 136
showing icons 88, 136
home screen applications
configuring 88, 136
finding information 88, 136
home screen buttons
understanding 84, 131
HTML menu 242
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 88, 136
showing 88, 136
Image menu 243
imaging unit
ordering 249
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 284
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 284
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 284
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 90, 138
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 284
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 285
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 285
indicator light 130
printer control panel 42, 83
individual settings
erasing 78
individual settings information
erasing 125, 173
Insert hole punch box 285
Insert staple cartridge 285
Insert Tray [x] 285
Install bin [x] 286
Install Tray [x] 286
installing an Internal Solutions
Port 16
installing an optional card 21
installing options
order of installation 28
installing printer hard disk 22
installing the printer software 34
Insucient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 286
Insucient memory to collate job
[37] 287
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 287
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 286
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 287
internal options 11
internal options, adding
print driver 34
internal print server
troubleshooting 313
Internal Solutions Port
installing 16
troubleshooting 313
IP address of computer
finding 87, 135
IP address, printer
finding 87, 135
IPv6 menu 204
J
jams
avoiding 262
locating jam areas 264
locations 264
jams, clearing
expander door 278
front door 266
mailbox 279
multipurpose feeder 272
rear door 267
standard bin 270
staple access door 275
staple finisher 273
trays 271
Job Accounting menu 234
K
keypad
printer control panel 42, 83, 130
L
labels, paper
tips 177
letterhead
loading, 2100‑sheet
tray 51, 98, 147
loading, multipurpose
feeder 58, 105, 154
loading, trays 44, 91, 140
Lexmark Print
using 68, 115, 164
linking trays 63, 110, 111, 159, 160
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] [paper orientation] 287
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] [paper
orientation] 287
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 288
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 288
Index 353
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom string] [orientation] 288
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name]
[orientation] 288
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] orientation] 289
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size]
[orientation] 289
Load staples 289
loading
2100‑sheet tray 51, 98, 147
card stock 58, 105, 154
envelopes 58, 105, 154
letterhead in 2100‑sheet
tray 51, 98, 147
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 58, 105, 154
letterhead in trays 44, 91, 140
multipurpose
feeder 58, 105, 154
optional 250‑sheet
tray 44, 91, 140
optional 550‑sheet
tray 44, 91, 140
standard 250‑sheet tray 44
standard 550‑sheet tray 44, 91
standard tray 140
transparencies 58, 105, 154
lock, security 77, 123, 172
M
maintenance kit
ordering 250
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 289
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 289
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 290
memory
types installed on
printer 77, 123, 172
memory card 11
installing 15
Memory full [38] 290
menu settings
loading on multiple
printers 72, 119, 168
menu settings page
printing 73, 120, 168
menus
Active NIC 200
AppleTalk 205
Bin Setup 198
Confidential Print 215
Configure MP 191
Custom Bin Names 197
Custom Names 196
Custom Types 196
Default Source 188
Edit Security Setups 213
Erase Temporary Data Files 215
Finishing 231
General Settings 218
Help 243
HTML 242
Image 243
IPv6 204
Job Accounting 234
list of 187
Miscellaneous 214
Network [x] 200
Network Card 202
Network Reports 202
Paper Loading 195
Paper Size/Type 188
Paper Texture 192
Paper Weight 193
Parallel [x] 207
PCL Emul 237
PDF 237
PostScript 237
PPDS 240
Print Settings 227
Quality 234
Reports 199
Security Audit Log 216
Serial [x] 210
Set Date and Time 216
Setup 229
SMTP Setup menu 212
Standard Network 200
Standard USB 206
Substitute Size 191
TCP/IP 203
Universal Setup 197
Utilities 236
Wireless 204
XPS 236
Miscellaneous menu 214
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in
output bin [24y.xx] 290
mobile device
printing from 68, 115, 163, 164
Mopria Print Service
using 68, 115, 163
moving the
printer 9, 10, 259, 261
multipurpose feeder
loading 58, 105, 154
N
Network [x] menu 200
Network [x] software error
[54] 290
Network Card menu 202
Network Reports menu 202
network settings
Embedded Web
Server 71, 118, 166
network setup page
printing 73, 120, 168
Networking Guide
where to find 71, 118, 166
noise emission levels 341
noise, printer
reducing 75, 121
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 290
non‑volatile memory 77, 123, 172
erasing 78, 125, 173
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 291
notices 341, 342, 343, 344, 345,
347, 348, 349, 350
number of remaining pages
estimate 248
O
optional 250‑sheet tray
loading 44, 91, 140
optional 550‑sheet tray
loading 44, 91, 140
optional card
installing 21
options
550‑sheet tray, installing 29
firmware cards 11
Internal Solutions Port,
installing 16
memory card 11, 15
printer hard disk, installing 22
printer hard disk, removing 26
Index 354
ordering
imaging unit 249
maintenance kit 250
roller kit 250
staple cartridges 249
ordering supplies
toner cartridges 248
P
paper
characteristics 178
letterhead 179
preprinted forms 179
recycled 179
selecting 179
setting size 43
setting type 43
storing 178, 180
unacceptable 179
Universal size
setting 43, 91, 139
using recycled 245
Paper changes needed 291
paper characteristics 178
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 316
paper jam in the duplex unit 270
paper jam in the expander
door 278
paper jam in the front door 266
paper jam in the mailbox 279
paper jam in the multipurpose
feeder 272
paper jam in the rear door 267
paper jam in the standard
bin 270
paper jam in the staple
finisher 273
paper jam in trays 271
paper jam, clearing
duplex unit 270
expander door 278
front door 266
mailbox 279
multipurpose feeder 272
rear door 267
standard bin 270
staple access door 275
staple finisher 273
trays 271
paper jams
avoiding 262
Paper Loading menu 195
paper size
setting 91, 139
Paper Size/Type menu 188
paper sizes
supported 181
Paper Texture menu 192
paper type
setting 91, 139
paper types
supported 181
Paper Weight menu 193
paper weights
supported 181
Parallel [x] menu 207
Parallel port [x] disabled [56] 291
parts
checking status 74, 120, 169
checking, from printer control
panel 120
checking, on the printer control
panel 169
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 74, 120, 169
using genuine Lexmark 248
parts and supplies, status of
checking, on printer control
panel 73
PCL Emul menu 237
PDF menu 237
Personal Identification Number
method
using 37
PostScript menu 237
PPDS menu 240
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 35
print driver
hardware options, adding 34
print irregularities 322
print job
canceling from the printer
control panel 70
canceling, from
computer 70, 117, 166
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 326
characters have jagged
edges 317
clipped pages or images 317
compressed images appear on
prints 318
gray background on prints 319
horizontal voids appear on
prints 320
print irregularities 322
print is too dark 324
print is too light 325
printer is printing solid black
pages 327
repeating defects appear on
prints 328
shadow images appear on
prints 329
skewed print 329
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 330
streaked vertical lines 331
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 333
toner rubs o 333
toner specks appear on
prints 334
transparency print quality is
poor 334
uneven print density 334
white streaks 335
Print Settings menu 227
print troubleshooting
confidential and other held
documents do not print 302
envelope seals when
printing 303
error reading flash drive 304
incorrect characters print 305
incorrect margins on prints 321
jammed pages are not
reprinted 315
job prints from wrong tray 305
job prints on wrong paper 305
jobs do not print 308
Large jobs do not collate 306
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 306
paper curl 322
paper frequently jams 316
print job takes longer than
expected 307
tray linking does not work 309
unexpected page breaks
occur 310
Index 355
printer
configurations 40, 81, 128
finishing features 183
minimum clearances 9, 10
models 40, 81, 128
moving 9, 10, 259, 261
selecting a location 9, 10
shipping 261
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 245
factory defaults,
restoring 76, 122, 171
indicator light 43, 84, 131
parts 42, 83, 130
Sleep button light 43, 84, 131
using 42, 83, 130
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 118
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 291
printer hard disk
disposing of 77, 123, 172
encrypting 79, 126, 174
installing 22
removing 26
wiping 79, 125, 174
printer hard disk
encryption 79, 126, 174
printer hard disk memory
erasing 79, 125, 174
printer information
where to find 7
printer IP address
finding 87, 135
printer is printing blank
pages 326
printer messages
Cartridge, imaging unit
mismatch [41.xy] 281
Change [paper source] to
[custom string] load
[orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to
[custom type name] load
[orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to
[paper size] load
[orientation] 281
Change [paper source] to
[paper type] [paper size] load
[orientation] 281
Check tray [x] connection 282
Close door or insert
cartridge 282
Close finisher rear door 282
Close rear door 282
Complex page, some data may
not have printed [39] 282
Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored
[57] 283
Defective flash detected
[51] 283
Disk full [62] 283
Disk must be formatted for use
in this device 283
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 283
Empty the hole punch box 284
Error reading USB drive.
Remove USB. 284
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 284
Imaging unit low [84.xy] 284
Imaging unit nearly low
[84.xy] 284
Imaging unit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 284
Incompatible output bin [x]
[59] 284
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 285
Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] [34] 285
Insert hole punch box 285
Insert staple cartridge 285
Insert Tray [x] 285
Install bin [x] 286
Install Tray [x] 286
Insucient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 286
Insucient memory to collate
job [37] 287
Insucient memory to support
Resource Save feature
[35] 287
Insucient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 286
Insucient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 287
Load [paper source] with
[custom string] [paper
orientation] 287
Load [paper source] with
[custom type name] [paper
orientation] 287
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] [paper orientation] 288
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] [paper
orientation] 288
Load multipurpose feeder with
[custom type name]
[orientation] 288
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper size] [orientation] 289
Load multipurpose feeder with
[paper type] [paper size]
[orientation] 289
Load multipurpose feeder with
custom string]
[orientation] 288
Load staples 289
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 289
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 289
Maintenance kit very low
[80.xy] 290
Memory full [38] 290
Misfeed cleared, extra sheets in
output bin [24y.xx] 290
Network [x] software error
[54] 290
Non‑Lexmark [supply type], see
User’s Guide [33.xy] 290
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 291
Paper changes needed 291
Parallel port [x] disabled
[56] 291
Printer had to restart. Last job
may be incomplete. 291
Reattach bin [x] 292
Reattach bins [x] – [y] 292
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive cartridge
[31.xy] 293
Index 356
Reinstall missing or
unresponsive imaging unit
[31.xy] 293
Remove defective disk [61] 293
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 293
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 294
Remove paper from all
bins 293
Remove paper from bin [x] 293
Remove paper from standard
output bin 294
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 294
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 294
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 295
Replace maintenance kit to
resume printing [80.xy] 295
Replace maintenance kit,
recommended life exceeded
[80.xyz] 295
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 295
Replace missing fuser
[31.xyz] 295
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 295
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 295
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 295
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 296
Replace wiper 296
Restore held jobs? 297
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 297
Some held jobs were not
restored 297
Standard network software
error [54] 297
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 297
Supply needed to complete
job 298
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 298
Too many bins attached
[58] 298
Too many disks installed
[58] 298
Too many flash options installed
[58] 298
Too many trays attached
[58] 298
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 299
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 299
Unsupported disk 299
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 299
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 284
USB port [x] disabled [56] 299
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 312
internal print server 313
Internal Solutions Port 313
tray problems 314
USB/parallel interface card 315
printer options, troubleshooting
2100‑sheet tray problems 311
printer problems, solving
basic 300
printer security
information on 80, 127, 175
printer setup
verifying 39
printer software, installing 34
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 117
canceling, from the printer
control panel 166
directory list 70, 117, 165
font sample list 70, 117, 165
from a computer 65, 111, 160
from a mobile
device 68, 115, 163, 164
from flash drive 66, 113, 161
menu settings
page 73, 120, 168
network setup
page 73, 120, 168
printing a directory list 117, 165
printing a font sample list 117, 165
printing a menu settings
page 120, 168
printing a network setup
page 73, 120, 168
printing forms 112, 160
printing from a flash
drive 66, 113, 161
printing held jobs
from a Macintosh
computer 69, 116, 165
from Windows 69, 116, 165
printing slows down 309
publications
where to find 7
Push Button Configuration
method
using 37
Q
Quality menu 234
Quiet mode 75, 121
using 170
R
Reattach bin [x] 292
Reattach bin [x] – [y] 292
recycled paper
using 179, 245
recycling
Lexmark packaging 246
Lexmark products 246
toner cartridges 246
reducing noise 75, 121
reducing printer noise 170
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
cartridge [31.xy] 293
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
imaging unit [31.xy] 293
remote control panel
using Embedded Web
Server 71
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 90, 138
Remove defective disk [61] 293
Remove packaging material,
[area name] 293
Remove paper from [linked set
bin name] 294
Remove paper from all bins 293
Remove paper from bin [x] 293
Index 357
Remove paper from standard
output bin 294
removing printer hard disk 26
repeat print jobs 69, 116, 164
printing from a Macintosh
computer 165
printing from Windows 165
repeating defects appear on
prints 328
Replace cartridge, printer region
mismatch [42.xy] 294
Replace defective imaging unit
[31.xy] 294
Replace imaging unit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 295
Replace maintenance kit to
resume printing [80.xy] 295
Replace maintenance kit,
recommended life exceeded
[80.xyz] 295
Replace missing cartridge
[31.xy] 295
Replace missing fuser
[31.xyz] 295
Replace missing imaging unit
[31.xy] 295
Replace roller kit [81.xx] 295
Replace unsupported cartridge
[32.xy] 295
Replace unsupported imaging
unit [32.xy] 296
Replace wiper 296
replacing a staple cartridge 256
replacing supplies
staple cartridge 256
replacing the toner
cartridge 251, 253
Reports menu 199
reserve print jobs 69, 164
printing from a Macintosh
computer 165
printing from
Windows 69, 116, 165
Restore held jobs? 297
restoring factory default
settings 122, 171
roller kit
ordering 250
S
safety information 5, 6
security
modifying confidential print
settings 72, 119, 167
Security Audit Log menu 216
security lock 77, 123, 172
security settings
erasing 78
security settings information
erasing 125, 173
security Web page
where to find 80, 127, 175
selecting a location for the
printer 9, 10
selecting paper 179
Serial [x] menu 210
Serial port [x] disabled [56] 297
serial printing
setting up 39
Set Date and Time menu 216
setting
paper size 43, 91, 139
paper type 43, 91, 139
TCP/IP address 203
setting the Universal paper
size 91, 139
setting Universal paper size 43
setting up serial printing 39
Setup menu 229
shipping the printer 261
showing icons on the home
screen 88, 136
Sleep button
printer control panel 42, 83, 130
Sleep Mode
adjusting 122
Sleep mode
adjusting 75, 171
SMTP Setup menu 212
Some held jobs were not
restored 297
standard 250‑sheet tray
loading 44, 140
standard 550‑sheet tray
loading 44, 91, 140
Standard Network menu 200
Standard network software error
[54] 297
standard tray
loading 44, 91, 140
Standard USB menu 206
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 297
staple cartridge
replacing 256
staple cartridges
ordering 249
staple jam in the finisher 275
statement of
volatility 77, 123, 172
status of parts
checking 120, 169
status of parts and supplies
checking 73
status of supplies
checking 120, 169
Stop or Cancel button
printer control panel 42, 83, 130
storing
paper 180
supplies 251
storing print jobs 69, 116, 164
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 330
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 331
streaks appear 335
Substitute Size menu 191
supplies
checking status 74, 120, 169
checking, from printer control
panel 120
checking, on the printer control
panel 169
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 74, 120, 169
conserving 246
storing 251
using genuine Lexmark 248
using recycled paper 245
supplies, ordering
imaging unit 249
maintenance kit 250
roller kit 250
staple cartridges 249
toner cartridges 248
Supply needed to complete
job 298
supply notifications
configuring 71, 118, 166
supported flash
drives 67, 114, 162
supported paper sizes 181
supported paper types 181
supported paper weights 181
Index 358
T
TCP/IP menu 203
The device is operating in safe
mode. Some print options may
be disabled or provide
unexpected results. 298
tips
card stock 176
labels, paper 177
on using envelopes 176
transparencies 177
tips on using envelopes 176
toner cartridge
replacing 251, 253
toner cartridges
ordering 248
recycling 246
toner darkness
adjusting 65, 112, 161
Too many bins attached [58] 298
Too many disks installed
[58] 298
Too many flash options installed
[58] 298
Too many trays attached
[58] 298
touch screen
buttons, using 86, 132
transparencies
loading 58, 105, 154
tips 177
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 299
trays
linking 63, 110, 111, 159, 160
unlinking 63, 110, 111, 159, 160
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 336
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 337
checking an unresponsive
printer 300
solving basic printer
problems 300
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 302
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 316
troubleshooting, print
confidential and other held
documents do not print 302
envelope seals when
printing 303
error reading flash drive 304
incorrect characters print 305
incorrect margins on prints 321
jammed pages are not
reprinted 315
job prints from wrong tray 305
job prints on wrong paper 305
jobs do not print 308
Large jobs do not collate 306
multiple‑language PDF files do
not print 306
paper curl 322
paper frequently jams 316
print job takes longer than
expected 307
tray linking does not work 309
unexpected page breaks
occur 310
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 326
characters have jagged
edges 317
clipped pages or images 317
compressed images appear on
prints 318
gray background on prints 319
horizontal voids appear on
prints 320
print irregularities 322
print is too dark 324
print is too light 325
printer is printing solid black
pages 327
repeating defects appear on
prints 328
shadow images appear on
prints 329
skewed print 329
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 330
streaked vertical lines 331
toner fog or background
shading appears on prints 333
toner rubs o 333
toner specks appear on
prints 334
transparency print quality is
poor 334
uneven print density 334
white streaks on a page 335
troubleshooting, printer options
2100‑sheet tray problems 311
internal option is not
detected 312
internal print server 313
Internal Solutions Port 313
tray problems 314
USB/parallel interface card 315
troubleshooting, printing
printing slows down 309
U
understanding the home
screen 84, 131
uneven print density 334
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 299
Universal Paper Size
setting 91
Universal paper size
setting 43, 139
Universal Setup menu 197
unlinking
trays 63, 110, 111, 159, 160
Unsupported disk 299
Unsupported option in slot [x]
[55] 299
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 284
USB port 32
printer control panel 42, 83, 130
USB port [x] disabled [56] 299
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 315
User’s Guide
using 7
using Hibernate
mode 76, 122, 171
using Quiet mode 170
using recycled paper 245
using the printer control
panel 42, 83, 130
using the touch‑screen
buttons 86, 132
Utilities menu 236
Index 359
V
verify print jobs 69, 116, 164
printing from a Macintosh
computer 165
printing from Windows 165
verifying printer setup 39
vertical voids appear 335
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 118, 166
voids appear 335
volatile memory 77, 123, 172
erasing 78, 124, 173
volatility
statement of 77, 123, 172
W
wiping printer hard disk 79
wiping the printer hard
disk 125, 174
Wireless menu 204
wireless network
configuration information 35
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 38
wireless setup wizard
using 36
X
XPS menu 236
Index 360